Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Dt9-Manualpdf PDF
Dt9-Manualpdf PDF
for the
Customer: Apex Industrials
Purchase Order No.: AI/3133/13
Stock Redler Indi a Private Limi ted Job No: 1272−0000
Stock Redler India Private Limited WBS No: VK/9113000317
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 1/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
MANUFACTURER:
STOCK REDLER INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED
PREPARED & CHECKED REVIEWED (QA & QC) REVIEWED (Service) APPROVED
NAME SIGN DATE NAME SIGN DATE NAME SIGN DATE NAME SIGN DATE
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
Mechanical 2/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 3/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
1.0 Installation
Stock Redler India Private Limited
This equipment manual is divided into sections which separate the material according to its principal use at
the site.
Section 1.0, for use by the equipment installers, covers receiving inspection, storage instructions, storage
maintenance procedures required, if any, and equipment installation procedures.
Section 2.0, oriented to the operations personnel, contains a system component description of the major
items of equipment supplied, an initial start-up sequence, and procedures for typical operation. The
maintenance staff, contains an inspection schedule, lubrication information, adjustment and calibration
procedures, and any necessary troubleshooting guides.
Sections 3.0 through 5.0 contain the schematic and connection diagrams, assembly drawings, and parts
lists. For ease in locating specific drawings, as well as to bring together all drawings of a similar nature,
Section 3.0 contains all the drawings certified for the specific project; Section 4.0 contains all mechanical
drawings; and Section 5.0 contains electrical and electronics drawings. The drawings within each section
are arranged in the section index in alphanumerical order except that supportive drawings, such as parts
lists and schematics, are indented and listed immediately beneath the related assembly drawing. To the left
of the drawing titles, the Stock Equipment Company part numbers are listed to specify the particular
assembly supplied from a tabulated drawing. The drawings themselves are then arranged exclusively in
alphanumeric order following the section index.
Section 6.0 contains vendor bulletins with specific adjustment, calibration, or service information.
Section 7.0 and following are included when necessary to present optional equipment supplied and
recommended spare parts. These sections are self-contained and are each arranged according to the
organizing principles employed in Sections 1.0 and 2.0 above, with a section index followed by the
operation and maintenance text and relevant drawings.
To keep the manual current, revision packages may be supplied for it as necessary. A Record Of Changes
form is provided in front of Section 1.0 to record these revisions as they are received and processed. It is
recommended that the instruction sheet from each revision package be filed behind the record of changes
for future reference.
Note
T h e d r a w i n g s a n d p a r t s l i s t s i n c o r p o r a t e d i n t h i s m a n u a l a re c o r r e c t f o r t h e
e q u i p m e n t s u p p l i e d . T h e t it l e b l o c k d e s c r i p t i v e i n f o r m a t i o n m a y n o t a l w a y s a g r ee
with the inform ation provided in the original propo sal or contract, but the drawing
c o n t e n t s a r e c o r r e c t f o r t h e e q u i p m e n t s u p p l i e d .
Note
This equipm ent manual is designed to s upp lement, not replace, the original
equipment manual supplied with the feeder. It deals only with additional
considerations pertaining to the weighing system electronics and feeder
m i c r o p r o c e s s o r c o n t r o l s .
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 4/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
INTRODUCTION
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Proprietary Note
T h e i n f o r m a t i o n i n t h i s m a n u a l , i n c l u d i n g t e c h n i c a l d a t a an d c o p i e s o f d r a w i n g s ,
e m b o d i e s i n f o r m a t i o n p r o p r i e t ar y t o S t o c k E q u i p m e n t C o m p a n y . Th i s m a n u a l is
p r o v i d e d t o t h e u s e r o f eq u i p m e n t p u r c h a s e d f r o m S t o c k E q u i p m e n t C o m p a n y f o r
use only in operation or maintenance of such equipm ent. Such inform ation in this
man ual is not to be us ed, disclosed, copied, reproduced in w hole or part for any us e
oth er than that indicated above, or for any oth er purpos e detrimental to the interests
o f S t o c k E q u i p m e n t Co m p a n y . P a t en t s o w n e d b y S t o c k E q u i p m e n t C o m p a n y h a v e
been issued or are pending on so me of the information in this m anual. Any
un autho rized use of this sub ject matter of such patents is a violation of such patents
a n d i s p r o h i b i t e d b y l a w.
Caution
T h e e l ec t r o n i c c o n t r o l s c o n t a i n E S D (E l ec t r o s t a t i c D i s c h a r g e ) s e n s i t i v e p a r ts a n d
a s s e m b l i e s t h a t c a n b e d a m a g e d b y s t a t i c e l ec t r i c i t y . T h e f o l l o w i n g s t a t i c c o n t r o l
precautions are required when testing, servicing, or repairing the
e l ec t r o n i c a s s e m b l i e s .
2. Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
3. Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis.
4. When replacing the electronic circuit board, do not remove the board from the static shielding bag
it came in until you are ready to install the board.
5. When removing any electronic circuit board, immediately place it in a static shielding bag.
6. Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory
for repair since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
Note
I f y o u a r e n o t f a m i l i a r w i t h s t a t i c c o n t r o l p r o c e d u r e s , b e f o r e r e p l a c i n g e l ec t r o n i c
c o m p o n e n t s , r e f er t o U S D e p a r t m e n t o f D e f e n s e D O D – HDBK -263, Electrost atic
Discharge Control Handbook for protection of electronic parts, assemblies,
a n d eq u i p m e n t .
7. Contact Stock Equipment Company’s Parts Department for a returns good authorization number
to facilitate the return of an electronic circuit board. Boards should be shipped in static shielding type
bags. If packing materials are used, they should be static-dissipative material.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 5/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
1.0 Installation
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Table of Contents
Manual Content
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 6/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
INTRODUCTION
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Notice
Revised reference material, written text and d rawings may b e furnished as required
t o u p d a t e th e i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a i n e d w i t h i n t h i s m a n u a l . W h e n r e v i s i o n s t o t h e
c o n t e n t o f t h i s m a n u a l a r e s u b m i t t e d , u t i li ze t h e R ec o r d o f C h a n g e s f o r m p r o v i d e d
to reco rd all revisions. Specific instruc tions m ay be provided in the Revision Packet
f o r r e c o r d i n g a n d i n s e r t i n g a l l c h a n g e s a f f ec t i n g t h i s m a n u a l .
Record of Changes
Change Date
Description of Changes Signature
Number Entered
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 7/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
1.0 Installation
Stock Redler India Private Limited
1.0 Installation
Section Index
Topic
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 8/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Upon delivery, inspect the equipment for shortages or evidence of physical damage and make a report to the
independent carrier. Also, notify the Contracts Department of Stock Redler India Pvt. Ltd., to arrange for
the shipment of replacement parts.
Prior to shipment from the factory, provisions have been made to protect the equipment in the event that
prolonged storage is required at the job site. These storage procedures are provided as recommendationsto
aid in maintaining the equipment in a warrantable and ready condition.
1.2.1 Storage areas shall be periodically inspected to ensure cleanliness. Discarded packaging and trash
shall be removed. Access shall be limited to authorized personnel. Upon placing an item in storage and prior
to its removal, the packaging and protective covers should be visually inspected to
ensure that all closures are intact. Any defects in the packaging may be repaired, after insuring that the
packaged material is intact and undamaged, using the original method of packaging. Surface preservatives
may be reapplied or touched up as required.
1.2.2 Equipment is to be stored in such a manner as to provide ready access for inspection and
maintenance with a minimum of handling. Items should be positioned so that any markings or labelings can
be easily identified without excessive handling. Shipping documents are attached to the outside of each crate
to identify the equipment contained inside.
1.2.3 All feeders with electronic enclosures mounted to them must be stored in a heated, ventilated
building where ambient temperatures may be controlled between 5°C minimum and 50°C maximum.
Control enclosure access doors must be tightly closed to engage the sealing gaskets.
Note
S y s t e m i n s t a l l a ti o n , s c h e m a t i c , an d c o n n e c t i o n d r a w i n g s a r e p r o v i d e d i n S e c t i o n
3.0, Certified Drawing s . A s s e m b l y d r a w i n g s a n d p a r t s l i s t s a re p r o v i d e d i n S e c t i o n
4.0, Mechanic al Drawing s and Parts Lists a n d Section 5 .0, Electrical/Electron ic
Drawings and Parts Lists .
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 9/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
1.0 Installation
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Important
Before perform ing any work inside the feeder, de-energize the feeder by locking the
.
m a i n c i r c u i t b r e a k e r o r d i s c o n n e c t s w i t c h i n t h e O FF p o s i t i o n
Important
S a f et y c o n s i d e r a t i o n s r e q u i r e t h a t e l e c t r ic a l a p p a r a t u s a n d e n c l o s u r e s b e s o l i d l y
c o n n e c t e d t o s a f e ty g r o u n d .
Note
S y s t e m i n s t a l l a ti o n , s c h e m a t i c , an d c o n n e c t i o n d r a w i n g s a r e p r o v i d e d i n S e c t i o n
3.0, Certified Drawing s . A s s e m b l y d r a w i n g s a n d p a r t s l i s t s ar e p r o v i d e d i n S e c t i o n
4.0, Mechanic al Drawin gs and Parts L ists a n d Section 5.0, Electrical/Electronic
Drawings and Parts Lists .
1.4.1 Close the inlet valve above the feeder and empty the belt.
1.4.2 De-energize the feeder and close the seal air supply if the feeder is so equipped.
1.4.5 Refer to Drawing S11154 and the drawings in Section 3.0, Certified Drawings. Mount the DT_9
microprocessor cabinet assembly onto the feeder by following the instructions provided on
the drawings.
Important
Do no t energize the feeder or the pow er to the contro l cabinets until a Stock service
engin eer is p resent. If a service engineer is n ot present wh en the feeder or the pow er
to the con trol cabinets are energized, damage to the equipment, injury o r loss of life
m a y o c c u r.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 10/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Note
E l e c t r ic a l c o n t r o l e n c l o s u r e s m u s t b e l at c h e d a n d s e a le d a t a ll t i m e s u n l e s s
i m m e d i a t e a c c e s s t o t h e m i s r e q u i r e d , b o t h a s a s a f e ty m e as u r e a n d t o p r e v e n t
m o i s t u r e d a m a g e t o c o m p o n e n t s .
1.5.1 Refer to Drawing D43566. Install the VFD conversion kit by following the instructions provided on
the drawing.
1.5.2 Refer to Section 2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance for information on programming and
calibration.
Caution
T h e e l ec t r o n i c c o n t r o l s c o n t a i n E S D ( El e c t r o s t a ti c D i s c h a r g e ) s e n s i t i v e p a r t s a n d
a s s e m b l i e s t h a t c a n b e d a m a g e d b y s t a t ic e l e c t r ic i t y . T h e f o l l o w i n g s t a t ic c o n t r o l
precautions are required when testing, servicing, or repairing the
e l ec t r o n i c a s s e m b l i e s .
Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis
When replacing the electronic circuit board, do not remove the board from the static shielding bag it came in
until you are ready to install the board
Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory for repair
since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
Note
E l e c t r ic a l c o n t r o l e n c l o s u r e s m u s t b e l a tc h e d a n d s e a le d a t a l l t im e s u n l e s s
i m m e d i a t e a c c e s s t o t h e m i s r e q u i r e d , b o t h a s a s a f e t y m e a s u r e an d t o p r e v e n t
m o i s t u r e d a m a g e t o c o m p o n e n t s .
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 11/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
1.0 Installation
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Note
Befo re installing electronics cards, all field w iring for the feeder control system m ust
b e c h e c k e d a n d v e r i f ie d . Im p r o p e r w i r i n g m a y r e s u l t i n s e v e re d a m a g e t o t h e
e l ec t r o n i c s c a r d s w h e n p o w e r i s a p p l i e d .
1.6.1 Refer the drawings in Section 3.0, Certified Drawings and Section 5.0, Electrical/Electronic
Drawings and Parts Lists .
1.6.2 Remove the new electronics cards from their individual packages and install them into the
microprocessor assembly by following the instructions provided on the drawings.
1.6.3 Refer to Section 2.0, D T _ 9 Operation and Maintenance for programming and
calibration information.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 12/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance
Stock Redler India Private Limited
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 13/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance
Stock Redler India Private Limited
®
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF
Instruction Manual
BV-H6411 GB
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 14/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance
Stock Redler India Private Limited
PASS - A service you can count on. Fast, comprehensive and anywhere in the world.
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company ’s philosophy. That is why we consider a com-
prehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commis-
sioning through to seamless support across the entire life cycle of our products.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever
and wherever you need us.
During business hours, our service specialists from all business areas are ready to analyze problems and
find the reasons for failures. You can find the Schenck Process location nearest to you on our website
www.schenckprocess.com .
Are you looking for individual and tailor-made service solutions? Then our modular PASS service system is
just right for you. It includes the entire range of services from simple inspections all the way down to a com-
plete service program. Further information can be found at www.schenckprocess.com.
Service:
Quality and reliability form the basis for our corporate philosophy all over the world.
In House Support (Monday through Friday from at least 8 o´clock to 5 p.m. CST). Service specialists are
available for technical assistance to answer your questions or assist you in trouble shooting.
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation, regardless of method, without prior permission
by STOCK EQUIPMENT in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited. Subject to change without prior notice.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 15/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Table of Contents
2 Safety notes................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Signal Words ................................................................................................................................................5
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings .......................................................................................................5
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes .....................................................................................................6
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering .................................................................................................6
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ...............................................................................................7
3 Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-9? ....................................................................................................... 9
3.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................................................................10
3.3 Measuring Principle ....................................................................................................................................10
3.4 Operating Modes - Remote ........................................................................................................................12
3.4.1 Gravimetric .........................................................................................................................................12
3.4.2 Volumetric ..........................................................................................................................................12
3.4.3 Volumetric Control..............................................................................................................................12
3.5 Operating Modes – OFF/Maintenance .......................................................................................................12
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -i-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 16/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 10 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 17/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
10 Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 59
10.1 General Information ....................................................................................................................................59
10.2 DT-9 Parameter List ...................................................................................................................................65
10.2.1 Parameter Overview ..........................................................................................................................66
10.2.2 Parameter Details ..............................................................................................................................82
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules ..........................................................................................82
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition .............................................................................................84
10.2.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources ..............................................................................................91
10.2.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ......................................................................................................97
10.2.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ...............................................................................................100
10.2.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring .........................................................................................101
10.2.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring ..............................................................................................108
10.2.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters.............................................................................................................113
10.2.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values...................................................................................................114
10.2.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ............................................................................................118
10.2.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ...............................................................................................121
10.2.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Moisture.........................................................................................................125
10.2.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control ............................................................................................128
10.2.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs .............................................................................................130
10.2.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs .................................................................................................134
10.2.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs...............................................................................................143
10.2.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration..........................................................................................150
10.2.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip.................................................................................................154
10.2.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval .....................................................................................156
10.2.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging .................................................................................................157
10.2.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe...........................................................................159
10.2.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus...............................................................................160
10.2.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet.........................................................................................................165
10.2.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs..................................................................................................166
10.2.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration..............................................................................168
10.2.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ......................................................................................172
10.2.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs ........................................................................................177
10.2.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................180
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -3-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 18/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
-4- November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 19/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
14.14.6.1 Digital inputs.....................................................................................................................................243
14.14.6.2 Digital Outputs..................................................................................................................................247
14.14.7 Analog Connections .........................................................................................................................250
14.14.7.1 Integrated Analog Input ....................................................................................................................250
14.14.7.2 Integrated Analog Outputs ...............................................................................................................250
14.14.7.3 Optional Analog Channels ...............................................................................................................250
14.15 Touchscreen Operating Panel VHM ........................................................................................................ 252
14.15.1 General Technical Data ...................................................................................................................253
14.15.2 Power Supply ...................................................................................................................................254
14.15.3 Data Interfaces .................................................................................................................................255
14.15.3.1 Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................255
14.15.3.2 Serial Interfaces: ..............................................................................................................................255
14.15.4 Housing Models ...............................................................................................................................256
14.15.4.1 Built-In Console Panel Units ............................................................................................................256
14.15.4.2 Portable Devices ..............................................................................................................................260
14.15.5 Connecting and Commissioning the Operating Panel .....................................................................263
14.15.5.1 Connecting the VHM Operating Panel via Ethernet ........................................................................263
14.15.5.2 Connection via RS-485 ....................................................................................................................264
14.15.5.3 Connection via Bluetooth .................................................................................................................265
14.16 Connecting EasyServe .............................................................................................................................266
14.17 Prefabricated system cables .................................................................................................................... 266
14.18 WLAN access point ..................................................................................................................................270
14.19 Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling ...........................................................................................................271
14.19.1 Thoughts on the Cable Connections................................................................................................272
14.19.2 Screened Cables..............................................................................................................................272
14.19.3 Unscreened Cables..........................................................................................................................273
14.20 EC Declaration of Conformity ...................................................................................................................273
Index .......................................................................................................................................................275
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -5-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 20/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 21/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Proprietary Note
The information in this manual, including technical data and copies of drawings, contains information that is pro-
prietary to Stock Equipment Company. This manual is provided to the user of equipment purchased from Stock
Equipment Company for use only in operation or maintenance of such equipment. Information in this manual is
not to be used, disclosed, copied, reproduced in whole or part for any use other than that indicated above, or for
any other purpose detrimental to the interests of Stock Equipment Company. Patents owned by Stock Equip-
ment Company have been issued or are pending on some of the information in this manual. Any unauthorized
use of this subject matter of such patents is a violation of such patents and is prohibited by law.
Caution: The electronic controls contain ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies that can
be damaged by static electricity. The following static control precautions are required when testing, servicing, or
repairing the electronic assemblies.
1. Disconnect power at the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
2. Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
3. Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis.
4. When replacing the electronic circuit board. Do not remove the board from the static shielding bag it came in
until you are ready to install the board.
5. When removing any electronic circuit board, immediately place it in static shielding bag.
6. Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory for repair
since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -1-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 22/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
7. Contact the Stock Equipment Company Parts Department for a returns good authorization number to facili-
tate the return of an electronic circuit board. Returned components should be shipped in static shielding type
bags. If packing materials are used, the y should be made of a static dissipative material.
Note: If you are not familiar with static control procedures, before replacing electronic components, refer to US
Department of Defense DOD - HDBK-263, Electrostatic Discharge Control Handbook for protection of electronic
parts, assemblies, and equipment.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
-2- November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 23/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally, you should observe:
▪ Safety hints given in order-specific documentation
▪ Safety hints relating to mechanical components
▪ Instructions and safety tips for parts manufactured by sub-suppliers or that are not part of Schenck Process's
scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Application
The measuring system and its connected mechanical components are exclusively designed for weighing and
controlling tasks. Any use other than originally intended is considered inappropriate.
Sources of Risk
If the measuring system has been correctly installed and commissioned, it does not pose any danger during
weigh operations.
Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Potential
hazards may then arise from e.g. additional devices through which the weighed goods are passed or metered.
Minor risks may arise in these situations if the measuring system is used or operated by untrained personnel.
The measuring system can be part of a more complex plant. The system operating company is fully responsible
for the operating safety of the system.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by quali-
fied personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the technical
documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions
given.
Changing Parameters
The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters. Only personnel familiar with the device's
mode of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Incorrectly set parame-
ters may cause injury or material damage. Furthermore they may also cause considerable disruption to weigh
operations.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -3-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 24/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Safety notes
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating compa-
ny must ensure that the password is handled safely.
Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any
connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.
All scales parts, electrical components in particular, must be protected from moisture and humidity when the
housing is opened for e.g. maintenance and service. In other respects the protection classes of the housing must
be observed.
Design Modifications
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process
voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which could
affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this requirement is
met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the warranty will
be void.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
-4- November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 25/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Safety notes
The following signal words indicate throughout this manual dangers that may arise when handling this machine:
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the most
severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up to
and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium inju-
ries.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -5-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 26/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Safety notes
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environmental
damage could occur.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product economi-
cally and at an optimal level of efficiency.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components.
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on live
components. Observe, among other things, the following:
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
-6- November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 27/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Safety notes
DANGER
Live damaged or defective components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are neither
damaged nor defective.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -7-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 28/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 29/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Overview
3 Overview
This chapter explains the principle functions of the DISOCONT Tersus system used in conjunction with a Stock
coal feeder.
▪ Basic Materials
▪ Cement
▪ Food
▪ Chemical.
In connection with the corresponding mechanical equipment, the following systems are supported:
▪ Belt Scales
▪ Weigh Feeders
▪
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 -9-
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 30/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Overview
3.2 Definitions
The table below explains some basic terms used in this manual.
Since the load cells only support half of the weight on the weigh span (each load cell supports 25 percent of the
total weight) the effective platform length (Leff) is calculated as:
Leff = Lg / 2
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 10 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 31/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Overview
The microprocessor computes the feeder belt load by repeatedly reading the voltage signal from each load cell
and converting the signal into a digital value (binary number) using an analog to digital (A/D) converter. Each
value is then compared to parameters stored in permanent memory to determine if the signal is within accepta-
ble limits, and if it is, it is stored for use. The same operation is then performed on the other load cell, and the
signals are compared to each other to test their validity. If the signals are determined to be invalid, the feeder is
switched to volumetric operation and the controller uses a simulated belt load calculated from an historical aver-
age stored in memory. If the signals are determined to be valid, the two load cell signals are summed, the tare is
subtracted and the result is multiplied by a scaling factor based on the load cell data specified in P04.01 LC
Characteristic Value and P04.02 LC Rated Capacity to determine the nominal weight of material on the belt. This
nominal value is then multiplied by the three range correction factors (P10.03, P10.04 and P10.05) to determine
the actual weight (QB).
The belt load (Q) is computed from the total weight (QB) as follows:
Q = QB / Leff
Note: The 196NT parameter 10 Weigh Span Length is the full distance between the two weigh span rollers. The
DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is half the distance between the two weigh span rollers. For
any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
Belt Speed
During normal feeder operation, the belt speed is calculated from the motor RPM rather then being measured
directly. The relation ship between motor speed and belt speed is determined during calibration and is displayed
as P10.02 Pulses per length.
The feeder control accepts a feedrate set point from the source selected using parameter P03.02 Feedrate Set-
point . This signal is com pared with a computed feedrate derived from measured weight and speed signals to
generate the system error signal which is used to adjust the speed of the motor. Compensation for system stabil-
ity is provided in the software using parameters P11.01 P-Component KP and P11.02 I-Component TN . These
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 11 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 32/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Overview
calculations are repeated periodically and at each iteration, the actual feedrate is multiplied by the time interval
to calculate the totalizer increment. Separate totals are kept for gravimetric and volumetric operation.
3.4.1 Gravimetric
Gravimetric Mode is the normal mode of operation. The feed rate is calculated using the belt speed and the ac-
tual belt load, and is controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control system. Parameter
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate , corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum feed rate is set by
parameter P03.06 Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate should always match parameter
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate . The system can be set to produce an error if the demand signal is outside to normal
range.
3.4.2 Volumetric
Volumetric Mode is used when an error is detected in the weighing system. The actual feed rate is calculated
using the belt speed and an assum ed belt load based on the average value over the last several hours, and is
controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control s ystem. Parameter P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate, corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum federate is set by parameter P03.06
Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate should always match parameter P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate. The system can be set to produce an error if the demand signal is outside to normal range.
Volumetric Control Mode is a variation of the gravimetric mode that is used when the feeder weigh system is
working correctly but the material on belt switch indicates that the belt is empty. The displayed feedrate and the
customer feedback signal is still based on the actual material being fed and the gravimetric total is still being
incremented but the belt speed is determined as if the feeder were in volumetric mode. This mode is used to
prevent the feeder from running to maximum belt speed when material flow is lost.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 12 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 33/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Overview
signals are ignored and feedback signals are not generated. The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode before a
system calibration can be performed. When the feeder is operated in the OFF/Maint mode, the belt speed is set
based on the value of parameter P02.16 Maintenance Speed . This is an open loop signal calculated as a per-
centage of the full scale signal to the motor speed control (see parameters P11.04 Lower Limit , P11.05 Upper
Limit and P01.06 Controller Magnitude Offset ).
In OFF/Maint mode belt can be started via the buttons on the VHM, via the Local key on the 196NT keyboard or
a digital input as defined by P15.25 DI: Local Start .
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 13 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 34/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 35/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
4 DT-9 Setup
This section describes the startup process when a new feeder is installed or when an existing DT-9 is replaced.
CAUTION
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier will dam-
age the DT-9. The old style Load Cell Amplifier must be replaced with the new
version before the DT-9 can be used.
CAUTION
DO NOT connect a normal Ethernet cable to X96 (red RJ45 connector).
This connector uses normally unused wires in the CAT 5 cable to provide power
to the touch screen display. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage
to the DT-9 or to the attached network device.
HINT
The weigh span is specified using parameter P04.03 Effe cti ve Pl a tfo rm
.
Length
This parameter is the distance between the weigh roller and either one of the
weigh span rollers. This is one-half the value used by the 196NT, which is the
distance between the weigh span rollers.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 15 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 36/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
▪ The DT-9 has one analog input (AI 1) and two analog outputs (AO 1 and AO 2). AI 1 is normally used as the
customer demand signal, AO 1 is normally used to control the motor speed control and AO 2 is normally
used as the customer feedback signal. These assignments are hidden and should not be changed.
▪
The DT-9 has four slots for auxiliary analog I/O cards (channels A10-A13). These channels are not normally
used. Contact Stock engineering if special analog I/O signals are required.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 16 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 37/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
15. Check the event displa y or the event line on EasyServe. They should both show a WM07 Event: Discharge
Pluggage alarm with a time stamp. Acknowledge the event and return the discharge switch to its original
state.
The controllers will come preprogrammed from Stock Equipment Company but if changes are needed, there are
two ways to do this:
▪ Using EasyServe Software (See section Parameters [➙ 59])
▪ Using the Touch Screen HMI (See Section The 'Setup' Screen [➙ 42])
The following is a list of parameters that are commonly changed during startup. Their values should be recorded
for future reference. See section Parameters [➙ 59] for a complete list and detailed descriptions.
The following parameters set the feedrate associated with a 100 % demand signal (usually 20 mA). They must
always be set to the same value. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
The following parameter is the belt speed associated with the nominal (maximum) feedrate and the nominal
material density. It is calculated as:
P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section
Inputs are in lbs/hour, lbs/cubic ft and square feet. Results are in inches/sec.
P02.06 Nominal Speed
The following parameter sets the minimum feedrate clamp. See project specific documentation for the correct
value.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 17 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 38/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
The following parameter selects the text string displayed on the top line of the touch screen HMI.
The following parameters select the units and formats that are used to display the various feeder information on
the display.
P02.01 Language
P02.02 Units
The following parameter selects the demand signal to the motor speed control when the feeder is running in
local mode. It is normally set to 50 %.
The following parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. It must be set to the dis-
tance between the first weigh span roller and the central weigh roller (one half the distance between the weigh
span rollers). See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P04.03 Effective Platform Length
The following parameter specifies the characteristics of the motor tachometer. See project specific documentati-
on for the correct value.
The following parameter specifies the area under the leveling bar. See project specific documentation for the
correct value.
P07.02 sets the maximum time between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pluses and P07.03 selects the type of event
that is generated when this limit is exceeded. Set P07.03 to IG if a BMM is not installed. See project specific
documentation for the correct values.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 18 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 39/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
The following parameter specifies the distance between the calibration probe bosses. See project specific
documentation for the correct value.
The following parameter specifies the actual value of the calibration weigh. This value is stamped on the weight.
The following parameters specify the cleanout conveyor duty cycle. Set P13.02 to zero to run the cleanout con-
veyor continuously.
The following parameters control the ‘Loss of Material on Bel t’ event. Setting P05.14 to A causes the feeder trip
(stop the feeder) when the coal on belt signal is lost during normal operation. Setting P05.14 to W1 or W2 will
produce a warning. P05.13 sets the delay between the time that the signal is lost and the time that the event is
generated (This is normally set to one second). Set P05.14 to IG to disable this feature.
The following parameters are used to control the Level/Temperature Sensor event. The Level/Temperature
Sensor input is normally connected to either a flow monitor in the downspout or a temperature switch at the
feeder discharge. Setting P15.21 to A causes the feeder trip (stop the feeder) when the coal flow monitor indi-
cates a loss of flow in the downspout. Setting P15.21 to W1 or W2 will produce a warning. P15.20 sets the delay
between the time that the signal is detected and the time that the event is generated. Set P15.20 to 100 lbs for a
quick response. Set P15.21 to IG to disable this feature. See project specific documentation for the correct valu-
e.
The following parameters specify the Ethernet communications address. The default values should not be
changed unless the DT-9 is connected to a local network.
P23.01 IP Address
P23.03 Gateway
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 19 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 40/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
4.4 Calibration
The feeder should be calibrated at startup, after one month of initial operation and every six months there after.
Calibration
board, or a should also
load cell be performed
module. following
The controller a weigh
should also roller adjustment
be calibrated afterorthe
replacement of the belt,
controller firmware the CPU or a
is updated
Load Default Values operation is performed. Calibration is accomplished in two separate steps.
Step one of calibration consists of the elimination of system tare, which includes the weight of the weigh roller,
load cell support assembly, and the feeder belt. It also involves measuring belt speed and its relationship to mo-
tor speed. Step two calibrates the load cell output with a known weight.
Cancellation of feeder tare is performed by measuring the average weigh system output over exactly two belt
revolutions (eight tape passes) and then subtracting this amount from the total weight measurement. When the
belt is running empty, it produces a zero average contribution to the totalized weight. In normal operation, the
average tare is automatically subtracted from the gross weight of the belt. Therefore, only the material weight on
the belt is reflected as totalized weight.
While the empty belt is being weighed, the belt speed is also being accurately measured. This is done by meas-
uring the time it takes a retro-reflective marker, attached to the belt, to travel between two fixed points on the
feeder body. This parameter is measured eight times to determine repeatability and to compensate for variations
in belt thickness. From this data, the belt speed is calculated and the relationship between belt speed and motor
speed is established. The feeder operates with zero belt slippage. Therefore, the ratio of belt speed to average
motor speed is constant. This ratio is stored in memory and is used to determine the belt speed for any motor
speed.
The span of the weighing system is set after the tare has been measured. A known weight is applied to the
weigh roller and the average output over exactly two belt revolutions (eight tape passes) is measured. This cali-
brated span factor is stored in memory and used to accurately determine the value of the weight of the material
on the belt.
Note: The DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is the distance from either weigh span roller to the
central weigh roller, which is supported by the load cell. This is half the distance between the two weigh span
rollers. For any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
The following special calibration processes can be preformed for testing or special maintenance operations, but
are not normally required.
1. TC: Span calibration - Chain test calibration.
2. LB: Pulses / Belt - Belt speed calibration.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 20 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 41/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
5 Load Cell
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 21 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 42/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
1. Loosen the jam nut, and then turn the adjustment block to lower the weigh roller.
2. Slowly turn the adjustment block to raise the weigh roller until the shim is touching both checking bar and
weigh roller (slip fit). Tighten the jam nut.
3. Similarly, adjust the weigh roller on the opposite side of the feeder.
4. Remove the checking bars.
5. Remove the calibration weights.
6. The feeder must be recalibrated after weigh roller adjustment. (See procedure on next page.)
Requirements:
▪ The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete cali-
bration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
▪ The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
– Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
– De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
▪
Four retro-reflective tape clips must be installed on the belt.
– The tape clips must be farther apart than the distance between the cal probes or a Probe Error will be
generated and the calibration will not complete.
– Four tape clips are normally used but two can be used if the feeder is very shot or eight can be used if
the feeder is very long or slow. If two tape clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over four belt revo-
lutions, instead of two, and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be twice the correct value. If eight tape clips are
used, the feeder will be calibrated over one belt revolution and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be half the
correct value.
▪ The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
▪ The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
▪ The feeder belt must be empty.
▪ The calibration weights must NOT be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
Before starting the calibration, record the values of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.10 Basic Tare
1. These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 22 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 43/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
This operation measures the load cell span factor and the belt speed factor, and updates the following parame-
ters.
▪ P10.03 Range Correction TW
▪ P10.11 Belt Circuit No.
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy pressing
<Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Requirements:
▪ The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete cali-
bration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
▪ The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
– Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
– De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 23 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 44/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
Calibration Procedure:
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.03 Range
Correction TW . These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
8. Upon completion of the calibration, four values will be displayed on the screen.
– Deviation (Variation between belt speed measurements)
– Belt Circuit No (P10.11)
– Range Correction TW (P10.03)
– Pulses per length. Value (P10.02)
9. After successful completion, the screen will prompt you to either save or cancel the calibration values.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration program
again.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 24 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 45/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
10. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
11. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest values
of P10.02 and P10.03 to the previous values (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the
formula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechani-
cal errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
▪ The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete cali-
bration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
▪ The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
▪ The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
▪ The feeder belt must be empty.
▪ The calibrated test chains must be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.04 Range Correction TC . This will be used
later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
3. Select TC: Span Calibration.
4. Initiate the TC: Span Calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional) Touch
Screen HMI. This process cannot be performed using the 196NT display.
5. The screen will prompt to add the calibration weight (test chain). The top line of the display will show the
value entered in P10.09 and the bottom line show what the load cells are measuring based on the current
calibration parameters. Press the <Start> button to proceed with calibration.
6. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process
– The motor will run at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed .
7. After Stabilizing the feeder will run for the number of belt revolutions specified in P10.07.
– The percentage complete will be displayed on the screen
8. Upon completion of the calibration, four values will be displayed on the screen.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 25 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 46/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
10. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration program
again.
11. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest value
of P10.04 to the previous value (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the formula [100 x
(new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the
weigh system and repeat the calibration.
The LB: Pulses per Belt calibration process is not intended for use in coal feeder applications and should not
normally be preformed.
This operation measures the weight of the empty belt (tare factor) for a period of time based on the value of
P10.11 Belt Circuit No. times P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) , and updates the following parameter.
▪ P10.10 Basic Tare
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy pressing
<Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
▪ The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete cali-
bration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
▪ The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
▪ The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
▪ The feeder belt must be empty.
▪ The calibration weights must NOT be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.10 Basic Tare. This will be used later to
verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
3. Select TA: Tare calibration.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 26 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 47/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
4. Initiate the TA: Tare calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional) Touch
Screen HMI. This process cannot be performed using the 196NT display.
5. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process
– Run the motor at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed .
6. After Stabilizing, the feeder will run for the specified time (P10.07 times P10.11). The DT-9 will display the
percent completion and the current tare value as a percentage of the rated belt load. The nominal belt load is
defined as the nominal flow rate divided by the nominal belt speed.
7. Upon completion of the calibration two values will be displayed on the screen:
– Deviation – Percent deviation between the new tare value and the previous value.
– Tare – Tare value as a percentage of the nominal belt load.
8. After successful completion, the screen will prompt you to either save or cancel the calibration values.
9. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration program
again.
10. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest value
of P10.10 to the previous value (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the formula [100 x
(new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the
weigh system and repeat the calibration.
Note: The plant combustion control system is the preferred source of the demand signal. This will precisely align
the feeder to the control s ystem.
The DT-9 has one built in analog input (4 - 20 mA or 0 – 10 VDC) and two built in analog outputs (4 - 20mA on-
ly). These I/O channels are described below.
1. AI 1: Connected to wires SIG+ & SIG- (X6-3, X6-4 or X6-3, X6-5). This input is normally used for the cus-
tomer demand signal. The value in P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint (normally hidden) should be set to AI 1.
2. AO 1: Connected to wires 142, 143 & 144 (X6-6 and X6-7). This output is normally used for the motor speed
control (VFD). The value in P11.03 AO: Motor Speed Control should be set to AO 1.
3. AO 2: Connected to wires 139, 140 & 141 (X6-8 and X6-9). This output is normally used for the customer
feedback signal. The value in P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate should be set to AO 2.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 27 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 48/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
In addition to the built in analog channels, there are four slots in which analog I/O cards can be installed. Param-
eter group 1 is used to assign each slot to an analog I/O channel (AI 2 through AI 5 or AO 3 through AO 6). Slots
can be either input or output, depending on the type of card installed. Each card is individually isolated.
The sensor records the position relative to the feeder frame of the triangles integrated into the belt. The result is
presented after one complete belt circuit.
The departure of the course of the belt from the neutral position can be shown in the operating area Setup.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 28 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 49/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
P07.04 Defines the input channel used to connect the sensor that monitors the triangle in the belt and
activates the function.
P07.08 Defines system behavior if the sensor and the triangles identify belt slippage.
P07.09
P07.10 The length L of the triangle, measured in the direction of belt motion (value is given in the scales
data sheet), as per the diagram.
The factory defaults are suitable for most situations.
P07.11 The width W of the triangle, measured transverse to the direction of belt motion (value is given in
the scales data sheet), as per the diagram.
P07.14 - P07.18 Tolerance thresholds and reactions to events belt-drift (advance warning) and belt-drift (critical
condition).
The factory defaults are suitable for most situations.
Tab. 1 : Parameter for BIC and for belt motion monitoring
Procedure to be followed
Step Task
3 Execute the adjustment program 'LB: Pulses/Belt ' and use the result after two complete belt circuits.
4 Set the sensor relative to the belt so that the course indicator shows zero. Small deviations can be adjusted
via P21.01.
For example:
For P07.12 = 0, display of belt drift = 0.2 then
For P07.12 = -0.2, display of belt drift = 0
5 By altering the value of P21.01, belt drift can be simulated and the system's reaction to this condition can be
observed.
Set P07.12 back to its original value after the test.
Tab. 2 : Sequence for adjustment and commissioning
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 29 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 50/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
Belt
speedslippage is defined
of the belt. as the difference
Belt slippage can resultbetween the speed ofhigh
from an excessively the belt as set
removal by the
force on head pulley
the bulk and the
material actual
from the
hopper, from soiling of the drive roller or from excessively low belt tension. Slippage influences directly measur-
ing and feeding accuracy, as the measured value for belt speed is calculated using the rotational speed of the
motor.
A carrying idler or the guide pulley is equipped with an impulse sensor. Standstill monitoring can only be used if
the feeder is run with a minimum feed rate setpoint. If the belt can be run with a feed rate of zero, a different
manner of belt slippage monitoring must be implemented if it is required.
After a short waiting period after the feeder is switched on, the signal sent to the input channel defined in P16.23
is evaluated. If this signal transmits no impulse within the time defined by P07.02, it will be assumed that the belt
is not moving. In this case the corresponding event is triggered (P07.03).
Belt slippage of only a few percent cannot be detected using this method.
If using a belt with a belt marking, this marking can be used to measure belt motion. The comparison between
the belt motion expected as a result of the head pulley motion and the distance measured across the duration of
two belt marking measurements allows the slippage to be detected with high accuracy. This method also allows
errors in the belt speed to be identified that result from soiling of the drive roller.
However, this method can only produce results after one complete belt circuit. A different method must be used
if more rapid identification is required.
In order to harness this method, the belt drift monitoring [ ➙ 28], the belt slippage threshold (in P07.07) and the
reaction to the event (in P07.08 and P07.09) must be set.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 30 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 51/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DT-9 Setup
Parameter Setting
P18.07 Tolerance threshold level for the difference of the speed measured across both measuring chan-
nels in relation to the actual speed.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 31 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 52/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 53/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DANGER
Feeding can be started with the operating panel. This switches on drives
and bulk material may flow. The operator must ensure that no damage can
be caused by beginning feeding before doing so.
Dangerous situations may arise if communication is interrupted while the
device is being operated via a non-permanent line (pluggable cable, wire-
less). Therefore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved
for service work only.
5.1 Connection between VHM Operating Panel and Scale Controller (VCU)
After a loss of power at the operating panel, the console will try automatically to reconnect to the scales with
which it was communicating before the power failure after a specific, adjustable period of time. During this time
the 'Feeder' page can again be selected to select a different scale.
If a data connection exists and communication with a different scales is to be activated, the existing connection
must first be closed. This can be done after logging on as a privileged user with the key '<->Scale'.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-established
after several attempts, the operating panel will open the configuration dialog.
The selection of a scales is shown in the following chapters, depending on the medium of communication.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 33 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 54/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown in the header of
the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: Connection can be established to one scales only, assuming the scales are not already connected to an-
other bluetooth adapter. The other connection may first need to be closed. If there is another connection, the
operating panel will try constantly to connect.
If bluetooth is used, the scales to whose bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only scales
with which communication can be made. The ethernet destination address may not be changed in the VHM.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 34 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 55/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communication
can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking beside the address number.
Otherwise this marking will be red.
Communication with the scales can be established with the key 'Con.Scale'.
Note: The operating panel is the master at the bus. Therefore only one operating panel can be connected to the
bus at any one time.
Note: Use either an uncoded VCU socket or, if using a red-coded socket, use a special cable (yellow) for the
connection.
The EasyServe address must be in the same ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. If necessar y the ad-
dress can be changed by EasyServe in the scanner. A scales can also be addressed using a router if the net-
work has already been configured. The scales address would then be entered manually, not using the scanner.
The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork.
The EasyServe Connection I Ethernet (Scanner) menu item is the easiest way to select. This will display all of
the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be altered and a connection to the
scales made here.
If the scale is connected to a different subnet, it can be selected manually using Connection | Ethernet (manual)
and entering the IP address of the scale.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 35 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 56/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a WLAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem has
been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales. The PC
also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP address.
In general the WLAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in the
modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN ac-
cess point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet connec-
tion were made by cable.
4 The PC user must enter a PAN once the connection to the bluetooth adapter has been established.
5 The address of the bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by param-
Establishing the connection: The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser
address line. This URL arises as follows:
< Adresse>/hmi/start_<Skalierung>x.html
Address: VCU IP address
Scaling: size of the display on the screen. The values 2, 3 or 4 can be entered.
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start_2x.html
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 36 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 57/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The user interface in the bro wser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel with the excep-
tion of the field in which a different scales can be selected, which is not available. The configuration dialogs for
the VHM operating panel itself are also not available. Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry
keyboard is not shown on the screen.
Various data from the controller can be called up in the left-hand navigation bar.
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are recorded with the entry time. The table is refreshed only
when it is called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with standard programs using select-
copy-paste.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 37 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 58/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 59/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Press the [VHM Addr.] button to change the network settings of the HMI. This screen allows you to set the IP
Address, Subnet, and Gateway of the HMI. These settings should be obtained from your network administrator.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes you have made to these settings before exiting.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 39 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 60/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Press the [Com] button to change the method by which the HMI will communicate with an attached DT-9 control-
ler. The available options are “Ethernet”, “Bluetooth ”, and “RS485”. The factory default is “Ethernet ”, and this
should not be changed.
The Home screen is the first screen displayed after the HMI has finished booting. It displays the current status of
the feeder, and contains the main operating controls.
The Mode Select buttons are located on the bottom left of the Home screen, and are used to select the operating
mode of the feeder (See sections Operating Modes - Remote [➙ 12] and Operating Modes – OFF/Maintenance
[➙ 12] for more information on operating modes).
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
- 40 - November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 61/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Press the [Remote] button to place the feeder in “Rem ote” mode. The background color of the Home screen will
turn white to indicate that “Rem ote” mode has been selected. At this point, the feeder is ready to receive com-
mands from the plant’s control system. Upon receipt of a feeder start command and a demand signal from the
control system, the feeder will begin to operate and the feeder graphic on the Home screen will indicate that the
feeder is running in the forward direction. As material fills the belt, the Belt Load and Material Total values dis-
played on the Home screen will begin to update. The feeder will respond automatically to the changing demands
of the plant’s control system until it receives a feeder stop command or until the [Off/Maint] button is pressed. If an
alarm occurs, it will be displayed in a banner across the top of the Home screen and can be cleared by press- ing
the [Ack Event] button. If a trip occurs, the feeder will be stopped and the display will automatically switch to
“Off/Maintenanc e” mode. The trip can be cleared by resolving the problem that caused the trip and pressing the
[Ack Event] button. “Rem ote” mode can then be resumed by pressing the [Remote] button.
The “Tr end” screen is a customizable line graph that can be used to plot various data item s that are logged by
the DT-9 over time. See Appendix C for a list of available data items.
The “Values” screen displays information about the feeder on two sub screens, which can be accessed by press-
ing the [Values] or [Totals] buttons.
The [Totals] button displays the following data:
▪ Material Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder, and is the sum of the Gravimetric and
Volumetric Totals.
▪ Gravimetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Gravimetric
Mode.
▪ Volumetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Volumetric Mode.
▪ The [Reset] button will reset all three totalizers. The total values cannot be recovered after the [Reset] button
is pressed.
The [Values] button displays the following data:
▪ Belt Speed shows the current speed of the belt in feet or meters per second.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 41 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 62/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
▪ Belt Load shows the weight of the material on the belt per unit of belt length in pounds per foot or kilograms
per meter.
▪ Speed shows the shaft speed of the belt drive motor in revolutions per minute.
▪
Density shows the currently calculated density of the material on the belt in pounds per cubic foot or kilo-
grams per cubic meter.
Pressing the Right Arrow button causes the display to scroll to the following additional buttons: [Trim], [Defaults],
[Simulation], [Calibration], and [Set Time]. Pressing the Right Arrow button again will cause the display to scroll
back to the initial list of buttons.
The [Trim], [Defaults], and [Calibration] buttons will be grayed out and unavailable unless the user is logged in to
the DT-9. The user must also log in before changing any of the parameters that are accessed via the [Parame-
ter] button.
To log in to the DT-9, press the [Login] button, enter the DT-9 password (the default is ‘”7353”), and press [Log-
in]. The previously selected screen will reappear and the [Login] button will change to [Logout] to indicate that
you have successfully logged in to the DT-9.
The following subsections describe the various screens that are accessed via the buttons on the “Setup” screen.
The “Data Log Values” screen displays the hourly and daily material totals in pounds or kilograms. The Up and
Down Arrow buttons can be used to scroll from hour to hour or day to day to view the previously saved totals.
The “Event Log Values” screen displays the Event Log and Comm and Log. The Up and Down Arrow buttons can
be used to scroll through the various events and user commands that were recorded by the DT-9.
The “Parameter Log Values” screen displays a log of all the DT -9 parameters that have been modified by the
user. The Up and Down Arrow buttons can be used to scroll through the various parameter changes that were
recorded by the DT-9.
The “Parameter ” screen is used to display and edit the various parameters available on the DT-9. Refer to Sec-
tion 9 of this manual for a detailed description of the available parameters and settings.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
- 42 - November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 63/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The top half of the “Parameter ” screen displays the current Parameter Block. The bottom half of the screen dis-
plays the various parameters that are available in the selected Parameter Block. Press the Up and Down Arrow
buttons to scroll through the various blocks and parameters.
To change the value of a parameter, press the [Edit] button (Note: the user must be logged in to change parame-
ter values). If the parameter contains a list of possible settings, a set of Up and Down Arrow buttons will appear
and can be used to scroll through the available options. If the parameter contains a discrete value, a text box will
appear. Press the [Save] button to save any changes that were made to the parameter value, or press the [Exit]
button to exit without saving any changes.
The “Trim ” screen is used to trim the analog inputs and outputs.
Any active analog input or feedback must be matched or adjusted to the DT-9 controls. Two signals levels must
be adjusted for each channel used. The first signal level, MIN, corresponds to the lower value being adjusted
and is transmitted when the feed rate is at 0%. The second level, MAX, corresponds to the higher value being
adjusted and is transmitted when the feed rate is at 100 %.
Note: If the feeder is not equipped with a remote analog demand input, the input alignment can be omitted. If an
analog output signal is not present, the output alignment section can be omitted.
Note: Unlike the 196NT, it is necessary to trim the analog output channel (normally AO 1) that is used to control
the motor speed control.
I/O Channel Adjustment
▪ When setting the output channels use a meter to measure the signal on:
– AO 1: Connected to wires 142, 143 & 144 (X6-6 and X6-7)
– AO 2: Connected to wires 139, 140 & 141 (X6-8 and X6-9).
▪
When setting the input channel source the signal to:
– AI 1: Connected to wires SIG+ & SIG- (X6-3, X6-4 or X6-3, X6-5).
Follow These Steps:
1. Press [Trim] to initiate the Trim function. Analog Output Channel 1 is always the first one displayed. To ac-
cess other channels use the arrow up or down buttons. Press [Exit] to get back to the main screen.
2. When aligning the output channels, the minimum and maximum analog signals are sent by the DT-9. The
user measures and enters the actual values. The AO 1 values are stored in P17.11 and P17.12, and the AO
2 values are stored in P17.13 and P17.14.
a) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the measure mode for output channel AO 1 Min. The DT-9 will
output the minimum signal value. The display will ask for the measured value. Enter the value measured on
your meter in the “ Analog value measur ed” text box then press [Save] to store.
b) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the measure mode for output channel AO 1 Max. The DT-9 will
output the maximum signal value. The displa y will ask for the measured value. Enter the value measured on
your meter in the “ Analog value measur ed” text box then press [Save] to store.
c) Repeat steps a. and b. for output channel AO 2.
d) Press the [Exit] button to exit the Trim function.
3. When aligning the input channel AI 1, the minimum and maximum analog demand signals are applied to the
input signal wires of the DT-9. The analog demand is measured then stored in P17.01 Analog Input 1 Min
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 43 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 64/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The “Defaults” screen allows the user to overwrite all parameter settings with the factory default values. The
[Custom] button will overwrite all parameters with the original values as set by Stock Equipment at the time that
the feeders were shipped. The [Factory] button will overwrite all parameters with the factory default values. In
general, the [Custom] button should always be used when resetting the parameters.
The Simulation Mode allows for operation of the feeder without material for test purpose, training or demonstra-
tion.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
The feedrate indicated and the feedback signal differ from the real rate of
flow.
Wrong of missing coal feeding. Wrong material totalizer.
When Simulation Mode the loadcell signal and the speed signal will be simulated in a way that the actual rate
shown follows the demand signal. This allows for.
▪ Check of the interface to the plant control
▪ Check of fieldbus signals
▪ Demonstration and training
For coal feeding operation the Simulation Mode must be switched off again.
The “Calibration” screen allows the user to access the various calibration functions. Refer to Section Calibration
[➙ 20] of this manual for a complete description of the available calibration functions. Press the Up and Down
Arrow buttons to select the desired calibration function, then press the [Start] button and follow the on-screen
instructions. When the calibration function has completed, press the [Save] button to save the new calibration
values or press the [Exit] button to exit without saving.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
- 44 - November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 65/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 45 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 66/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 67/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 47 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 68/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 69/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
8.3 Installation
EasyServe
Insert CD VPC20150 into CD-ROM drive. Normally, installation starts automatically. If not, open Windows ex-
plorer select your CD-ROM drive. To open, double click on file. The automatic installation program prompts you
through a number of dialogs, for you to confirm.
Upgrade
If an old EasyServe version is available on your PC it must be removed (using Control Panel | Add or Remove
Programs) before the installation can be performed.
Attention
To be able to install the EasyServe program, your name must be registered as user in the group of administra-
®
tors under Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7. To execute program, main user rights are required.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 49 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 70/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
CAUTION
DO NOT use the RJ45 connector marked X96 to connect the DT-9 to a lap-
top or PC.
This connector is designed to supply power for the Touch Screen HMI through
normally unused connections. Connecting a PC to X96 could cause damage to
the DT-9, the PC or both. A red cover is normally installed over this connector to
prevent it from being used with a PC.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the alternate IP address once the DT-9 update has been completed.
When the Ethernet port is configured as described above, the PC/Laptop can be connected to a DT -9 or a
company network without changing the settings.
7. If the Ethernet port has been set to a fixed IP address, the Obtain an IP address automatically button will not
be set and the Alternate Configuration tab will not be visible. In this case either the fixed IP address can be
changed, by changing the IP address and Subnet mask fields in the Use the following IP address: box, or by
selecting the Obtain an IP address automatically button and following steps 5 and 6. In either case, the pre-
vious IP address and Subnet mask should be recorded prior to making any changes.
8. Select OK and back out.
9. Make the physical connection to the DT-9 by installing a CAT 5 cable (either straight through or crossover)
between the PC Ethernet port and any of the RJ45 connectors on the DT-9 except X96. X96 uses normally
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 50 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 71/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
unused connection to supply power to the Touch Screen HMI and connecting a PC to X96 could cause
damage to the DT-9, the PC or both. See the warning above.
10. Start EasyServe and select the Connection | MODBUS TCP (Scanner) option. The controller if connected
Windows® Vista
1. Select Network Connections in Control Panel.
2. Double click on Network and Sharing Center.
3. Click on the Manage Network Connections line, on the left side of the window.
4. Double click on the network connection that will be used to communicate with the DT-9. This is normally
marked Local Area Connection.
5. In the Local Area Connection Status window, click on the Properties button. This will bring up the Local Area
Connection Properties dialog box.
6. Proceed to step 4. above.
HINT
Once registered any parameter changes or commands are sent to the
feeder immediately.
To unregister click the yellow key toolbar button and make it go back to red lock (or go to Edit – Unregister or
press F3 on the keyboard).
Once connected to a DT-9 go to View – Parameter set: Online to access the parameter set. It’s displayed along
the left side of the screen organized by parameter block. To view the parameters click on a block and they will be
displayed on the right.
At the bottom of the parameter set the events and hardware configuration can be accessed.
▪ Events
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 51 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 72/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
– All the events for the DT-9 are listed here in groups similar to the parameters. Click on a group to see the
event names and numbers on the right. The parameter that corresponds to the event will be listed after
the name. If you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that controls it.
▪
Hardware configuration
– This contains a list of all the Analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs/outputs and Load Cells. Just like the
event list if you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that controls it.
Feeder files for EasyServe are saved as .PAR files. To load a .PAR go to File | Open. Once the file has been
opened, the parameters can be viewed and changed. The background color remains a bluish-gray as long as
you are just editing a .PAR file and have not loaded it to a DT-9.
To send the file, a feeder connection is required. Once the connection has been established, the background
changes to white and displays the parameter set currently on the DT-9. Open the .PAR file you wish to load or
go if it was already opened you can just go to View and select the parameter set by name. The background
should go back to the bluish gray color as before. Go to File | Transmit, check the box of the parameter set to be
loaded and click OK. Click OK on the next pop up saying it may take a minute.
A set of custom default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. Loading custom defaults will load the
parameters setup by Stock Equipment.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Edited parameters and calibrating values are reset.
We recommend that you print parameters using the Print Parameters function
before loading default values.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 52 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 73/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
To load:
▪ Go to Tools | Commissioning | Load Custom Defaults . EasyServe will ask for verification that you want to
load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
A set of Factory default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. These are the controller default values,
NOT the initial Stock values.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
The Load Default Parameters operation will reset all calibration values and
any parameters that have been edited, and will also reset the Custom De-
fault Parameters.
Stock recommends that parameters be printed or saved to disk before loading
default values. Stock does not recommend loading factory defaults except after
a firmware update, or when a memory error is detected.
To load:
▪ Go to Tools – Commissioning – Load Custom Defaults . EasyServe will ask for verification that you want to
load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
A printout of the parameter set can be done by going to File | Print. A window will pop up giving you a few
checkbox options for what to include on the printout:
▪ Only changed Parameters – Parameters that have been changed since the last loading of a parameter file.
▪ Only visible Parameters – Does not print any parameters that have been set to hidden in expert mode.
▪ Hardware configuration – This will add a list of the analog/digital inputs/outputs, and Load cells to the end of
the parameter set on the printout
Click print when ready to proceed with printout.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 53 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 74/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
8.6.2 Events
Events will be displayed across the bottom of the EasyServe screen (The event can also be viewed by going to
View | Events, bringing up the event window). Alarms and warnings can be ack nowledged, after correcting the
situation, by clicking on the red X toolbar button. The event message on the bottom will go back to “No Events”.
8.6.3 Calibration
See section Calibration [➙ 20] for feeder calibration instructions.
time. To open a service value window go to View – Service Values, and select one. There is no difference in the
ten windows the same inform ation can be accessed from any of them. The values are divided up b y eight tabs
across the top to access different information as listed below.
1. MV 1
– Load cell info
– Tachometer Hz
– Speed set point
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 54 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 75/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
8.6.5 Trends
Like the service values, ten trend windows can be opened. Within each trend window the following values can be
viewed.
▪ Feeder On
▪ Flow Rate
▪ Totalizer 1
▪ Totalizer 2
▪ Belt Load
▪ Belt Speed
▪ Actual Setpoint
▪ Deviation
To open a trend window, add the desired values, and modify the trend, follow these steps.
1. Go to View – Trend – and select one of the ten trends.
2. The trend window will pop up. W hatever the last selected values were, for that trend window number, will be
displayed.
3. To change the scaling of the graph or add a name click the third button from the left on the top of the trend
window (the modify button). A window will pop up, edit the fields in the top right to the desired values.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 55 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 76/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
4. While still in the modify window click on value 1 on the left side.
5. Here you can select what you want to appear on the trend. To add this value to the trend make sure the dis-
play field is set to yes. Next, click the signal source button. A window will pop up where you can select one of
the above mentioned values. Select the one you want and click apply.
6. The name and color can be modified for each value also in the fields below the signal source button.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add as many values as you want to the trend.
8. Click save and close to apply the settings to the trend.
Note: The first two buttons at the top left are for starting record and stopping the trend. The fourth button (red X)
deletes the recorded trends.
8.6.7 Options
The EasyServe options can be accessed by going to Tools | Options. The options window opens and has 4 tabs.
This window lets you change language preferences, communication settings, display settings, print settings and
working folder for the parameter set loaded. You can also load the factory default parameters, STOCK DOES
NOT RECOMMEND LOADING FACTORY DEFAULTS.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 56 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 77/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Testing
9 Testing
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 57 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 78/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Testing
Requirements
▪ Handling route from weighing platform to material collecting point is totally clean.
▪ No material is diverted during the test.
▪ If feed screws or air slides are provided between platform and collecting point, run the system with material
for approx. 30m minutes before starting the material test. This will allow the normal build-ups to form on feed
units.
▪ Do not remove dust or clean the equipment during the test.
▪
Hoppers or vehicles transporting the material to a legal-for-trade commercial scale have been cleaned and
re-weighed before filling (tare weight).
Example:
Within a certain period of time, e.g. 15 min., an actual material amount MW of 4.9 t is fed. The material value MA
displayed on DISOCONT is 5.0 t. The new value of P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN is computed using the
following formula:
Parameter P09.01 (new) = Parameter P09.01 (old) * MW / MA
In our example, value is 0.98.
Enter new value into Parameter P10.05 Range Correction TM .
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 58 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 79/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
10 Parameters
This chapter discusses the parameters available with DT -9. Some parameters are not normally used on Stock
coal feeders. These parameters are hidden by default and are marked as Normally Hidden in the parameter list
below. These parameters can be viewed, modified or made visible using the Expert Mode in EasyServe. Use the
Edit | Expert Mode menu selection or the F6 key. The default password is 7353.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 59 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 80/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
There are parameters whose availability depends on other parameters setting values. These dependencies are
stated in the header of every parameter description.
Abbreviations:
Signal Description
Source/Destination
FB Fieldbus (optional interface required)
OP Operator Panel (control unit type VHM)
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
LC Load Cell
LS Logical Signal
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 60 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 81/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Signals Description
I Flow rate
Q Belt load
VB Belt speed
TCI Totalizer Counter Increments
Step Description
1. Select source or destination of signal DI, DO ...,...
"n/a" means "not assigned", i.e. function is not available.
Hardware Configuration
When signal path configuration parameters are set, the source/destination determines whether unit, channel and
level must be additionally indicated or not. The following table applies:
Possible hardware configurations:
FB
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 61 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 82/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
OP
n/a
LC VCU103
VCU104
VCU1 LC1 - LC2
VCU2
VCU3
Fieldbus (FB), control unit (OP), speed (v), not assigned (n/a) and the low-resolution analog input (DI4) does not
require additional specification for unit, channel or level.
Analog inputs (AI), outputs (AO) and load cell (LC) require the unit to be specified.
Digital inputs (DI) and outputs (DO) require unit, channel and level to be specified.
Example:
Parameter P 16.21 determines the relay output that indicates that a warning (W1 or W2) event is active.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 62 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 83/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, the output relay is either DO 8 for
the VCU 20103, or DO 13 for the VCU 20104. The available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions are shown
in the next two rows.
Event Messages
Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.
Alarm A All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1 W1 The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2 W2 The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been cor-
rected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore IG Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Sequence monitoring SC
Electrical system WE
Mechanical system WM
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 63 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 84/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Interlocking IL
Controllers CO
Calibration CA
Maximum HI
Minimum LO
Example:
Some parameters specify the response to an error event.
Parameter P01.02 determines the response to event SY12, Event: Communication ARM7 .
Options: IG
A (Stop feeder)
W1 (Warning – Manual reset)
W2 (Warning – Automatic reset)
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, an alarm is generated and the
feeder is stopped. The second row shows the event group and number (SY12), and the third row shows the
available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions. All of the normal event options are available for this event.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 64 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 85/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 65 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 86/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
01 - Hardware Modules
➙
P01.05 [ 82] Analog Channel A12 NO 5748
P01.06 [➙ 82] Analog Channel A13 NO 5749
02 - Feeder Definition
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 66 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 87/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P02.20 [ 84] Codepage * Unicode UTF-8 6242
P02.21 [➙ 84] DC_Mode * NO 6243
03 - Control Sources
04 - Rated Data
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 67 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 88/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P04.09 [ 97] Tachometer: Pulses per Rev * 60 P/rev 5690
P04.10 [➙ 97] Load cross section * 157 inch2 5730
05 - Feeder control
06 - Feeder Monitoring
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 68 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 89/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
07 - Belt Monitoring
08 - Filters
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 69 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 90/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
09 - Limit Values
10 - Calibration Data
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 70 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 91/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
11 - Rate controller
12 - M oisture
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 71 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 92/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P12.10 [ 125] Event: Moisture MAX IG 5393
P12.11 [➙ 125] AO: Flow Rate corrected n/a 5394
13 - Cleanout control
14 - Analog Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 72 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 93/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P14.15 [ 130] Deviation Range 20 mA 4399
P14.16 [➙ 130] AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd) n/a 4306
15 - Digital Inputs
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 73 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 94/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P15.25 [ 134] DI: Local Start n/a 5737
P15.26 [➙ 134] DI: Jog forward n/a 5738
16 - Digital Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 74 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 95/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P16.18 [ 143] DO: Volumetric Mode DO 4444
P16.19 [➙ 143] DO: Volumetric Mode (2nd) n/a 5675
17 - Analog calibration
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 75 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 96/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P17.20 [ 150] Analog Output 5 Max 20 mA 5667
P17.21 [➙ 150] Analog Output 6 Min 4 mA 5668
18 - 2-Sensor Slip
19 - Maintenance interval
20 - Data Logging
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 76 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 97/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P20.02 [ 157] Daily Total Time 0 min 5744
P20.03 [➙ 157] Logger cycle time 1 min 6288
21 - Communication EasyServe
22 - Communication Fieldbus
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 77 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 98/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P22.12 [ 160] Physics RS232 6186
P22.13 [➙ 160] Address 16 4539
23 - Ethernet
24 - PLC Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 78 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 99/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 79 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 100/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P26.02 [ 172] Offset FCB_AO 1 4 mA 6272
P26.03 [➙ 172] Range FCB_AO 1 20 mA 6273
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 80 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 101/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
➙
P27.08 [ 177] FCB_DO 08 n/a 20536
P27.09 [➙ 177] FCB_DO 09 n/a 20537
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 81 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 102/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The VCU 20103 has three built in analog channels and four slots for analog I/O modules. On the VCU 20103
channel A10 is closest to the power supply and channel A13 is farthest from the power supply.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch screen HMI
must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located toward the center of
the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not opera-
te when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 82 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 103/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
This parameter specifies the analog I/O card that is installed in position A10. It is connected
to terminal blocks X12-1 and X12-2.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
Alternative: NO
AI3 (Analog In 3)
AO4 (Analog Out 4)
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A11. It is connec-
ted to terminal blocks X12-3 and X12-4.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
Alternative: NO
AI4 (Analog In 4)
AO5 (Analog Out 5)
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A12. It is connec-
ted to terminal blocks X12-5 and X12-6.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 83 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 104/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A12. It is connec-
ted to terminal blocks X12-7 and X12-8.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
This parameter group is used to specify the rating of the components in the weighing system.
Alternative: DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
This parameter selects the language used in DT 9 displays. When it is set to “OTHER” the
individual display strings can be set using EasyServe.
Alternative: Metric
English
This parameter selects the units used for displays and parameter inputs. Either SI (metric)
or normal American (English) units may be selected.
This parameter specifies the text string to identify the feeder and is shown on the top line of
the touch screen HMI.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 84 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 105/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the password used to restrict access to various controller func-
tions.
Note: This parameter can be changed using EasyServe in the event that the password is
lost.
Note: Some functions may require an alternate password. The default value is 7353.
This parameter is used to specify the feeder design feedrate. It is similar to 196NT Setup
05 (Maximum Feedrate) and is used for limit alarms and display outputs. It should always
be set to the same value as parameter P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. It is also used to scale
the analog I/O channels and to calculate the simulated load when the controller is installed
on a volumetric feeder.
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project manual or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is
selected.
Note: If both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 are set to Not Used,
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Speed )
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 85 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 106/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter is used to scale the belt speed analog output (i.e., Maximum analog signal
= Nominal speed) and serves as the reference value for limit value monitoring. Nominal
speed, together with nominal feedrate, is used to calculate the nominal belt load.
(P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate ) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section)
Note: If both P04.07 Belt LC Left and P04.08 Belt LC Right are set to Not Used, the load
cells will be disabled and the system will operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9 will cal-
culate an assumed belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Belt
Speed as shown below.
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Belt Speed)
Alternative: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
This parameter allows the operator to either, accept the standard set of display formats
(determined by the controller based on the P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) or to select the
display formats individually using parameters P02.08 through P02.11.
This parameter
STANDARD, should
which be set according
is suitable to customer preference. The default value is
for most applications.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 86 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 107/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter selects the format used to display feedrate values. It is only visible when
parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available options de-
pend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units .
Alternative: ------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 1. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units .
Alternative: ------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 2. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units .
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 87 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 108/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: ------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 3. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units .
Alternative: DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Total Coal Integrator (TCI).
The TCI cycles continuously while the feeder is in operation. To prevent premature failure
of the output relay this parameter should always be set to DO 12 (Reed Relays - Terminal
blocks X16-3 through X16-6).
This parameter sets the weight associated with each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is
the same as 196NT Setup 07 (Remote Totalizer Data Logging Increment).
The TCI output frequenc y is based on parameter P02.11, parameter P02.12 and the actual
feedrate. If the values selected for these parameters require an output frequency greater
then the maximum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be ge-
nerated. See parameter P02.12 for more information.
Min: 0 s Max: 10 s
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 88 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 109/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter sets the duration of each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is the same as
196NT Setup 35 (Remote Totalizer Pulse Width).
The TCI output frequency is based on this parameter, parameter P02.11 and the actual
feedrate. If this combination of values requires an output frequency greater then the maxi-
mum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be generated.
When the TCI output is directed to an open collector or reed relay output the maximum
possible pulse frequency is 10 Hz (P02.12 set to 0.05 sec). When the TCI output is directed
to a mechanical relay output the maximum possible pulse frequency is 1.0 Hz (P02.12 set
to 0.5 sec). When the pulse length (P02.12) is increased, these values are reduced.
To insure that the TCI output works correctly the maximum pulse frequency must always be
less then the maximum possible frequency.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the Total
Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can operate. See
parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a smaller valu-
e.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 89 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 110/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter determines the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal used during
maintenance (local, calibrate, jog) operations. It is similar to 196NT Setup 01 (Speed Set-
point) except that the MSC demand signal is set rather then the actual motor speed (open
loop operation). The actual motor RPM is determined by the characteristics of the motor
and the MSC.
This parameter is normally set to 50% which will produce a motor speed of approximately
900 RPM with a 4 pole, 60 Hz motor.
Alternative: DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Feed Rate Indicator (FRI). This
parameter output can only be set to DO 13 (terminal block X6-1 and X6-2) which is an iso-
lated, unpowered, transistor output.
The value of this parameter is used to calculate remote Feedrate Indicator (FRI) output
frequency. It must be selected so that the FRI output at the minimum feedrate (see P03.06)
is greater then 1.0 Hz and the FRI output at the maximum feedrate (see P03.06) is less
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 90 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 111/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter allows for changing of the type of load cell excitation voltage.
When set to NO, the load cell is supplied by a rectangular AC voltage. This mode should be
used in case the load cell is connected straight to the load cell interface of the controller.
This mode provides best suppression of thermal effects in the load cell cable and term inals.
When set to YES, the load cell is supplied by a DC voltage. This mode requires the installa-
tion of an external load cell amplifier close to the load cell with a transmission of the DC
output signal on a higher voltage and current level to suppress thermal effects in the load
cell cable and terminals.
This parameter group is used to select the control sources for use during Remote mode operation.
Alternative: DI
OP
FB
This parameter selects the digital input used as the feeder start command.
Caution: This is a static input! Switching to remote control mode with the start input acti-
vated will start the feeder.
This parameter is normally set to DI 2 – High (terminal block X1-4) and is connected to wire
112.
Alternative: AI
OP
FB
R-L
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 91 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 112/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter selects the source for the feedrate demand signal and can be set to the
following values:
AI 3 for use with an analog (usually 4-20mA) input signal on SIG+ and SIG-
R-L for use with the Raise/Lower input signals (See P03.07 and P03.08). The demand sig-
nal is set to its lower limit in case the feeder is switched off.
OP for use with EasyServe
FB or remote control using a Field Bus
This parameter is normally set to AI 3. Check the certified drawings to insure that the pro-
per value is selected.
This parameter determines the nominal 100% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA or 0-10V input.
This parameter is normally set to 20.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an
analog input signal.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.
This parameter determines the nominal 0% signal level for the analog input channel.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an ana-
log input signal. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 92 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 113/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This is the maximum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate above this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 05 (Maximum Feed-
rate). It should alwa ys be set to the same values as parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter is set based on custom er requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value
is selected.
This is the minimum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate below this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 06 (Minimum Feed-
rate).
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the minimum motor speed.
Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is sel-
ected.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the raise feedrate setpoint com-
mand.
This parameter is normally set to DI 3 – High (terminal block X1-2), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 113.
Alternative: n/a
DI
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 93 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 114/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the lower feedrate setpoint com-
mand.
This parameter is normally set to DI 11 – High (terminal block X4-5), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 114.
This parameter determines the speed at which the feedrate setpoint changes when the
raise or lower input is active. The value represents the approximate time, in seconds, for
the setpoint to go from 0% to 100%. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 28 (Rai-
se/Lower Response Time).
Alternative: DI
n/a
FB
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the belt motor start permissive.
When it is enabled, (set to a digital input) an active signal on the designated input is requi-
red to start the belt drive motor. When it is set to n/a, this feature is disabled.
This parameter is normally set to DI 8 - High (terminal block X3-4) and is connected to (wire
111).
Caution: Setting this parameter to n/a will disable the Run Enable feature and create an
unsafe operating condition. The Run Enable input must ALWAYS be enabled and connec-
ted to a user accessible stop switch.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 94 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 115/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the Run
Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run Enable
feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
The parameter is normally set to W2 so that there is an indication on the display when the
feeder is disabled.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to
DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This switch is used to
stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or disconnected.
Action:
- Check the position of the Run Enable switch.
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT displa y and in this
case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 95 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 116/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter is used to enable the Remote (P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL) and Local
(P15.25 DI: Local Start ) digital inputs. The Remote and Local digital inputs are edge trigge-
red, meaning that their function is initiated by the transition from OFF to ON or, ON to OFF
rather then by their state. This type of operation allows the feeder to be stopped due to an
error condition or a keyboard input, even when the digital input is active.
The operation of the Remote and Local digital inputs is described below.
Keyboard Only - Both the Remote and Local digital inputs are ignored at all times.
Keyboard & Local - The Remote input is ignored but the Local input is active. If the feeder
is in OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will cause the feeder to run
in Local mode. If the feeder is in OFF/Maint mode and running, de-energizing the Local
input will cause the feeder to stop.
Keyboard, Remote & Local - Both the Remote and Local input are active. If the feeder is in
OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will start the feeder in Local mode
and energizing the Remote input will force the feeder into Remote mode. If the feeder is in
OFF/Maint mode and running, the Remote input will be ignored and de-energizing the Local
input will stop the feeder. If the feeder is in Remote mode, the Local input is ignored and de-
energizing the Remote input will force the feeder into OFF/Maint mode.
The keyboard is always enabled regardless of the value selected for this parameter.
This parameter is normally set to Keyboard Only.
This parameter is used to set motor RPM when P03.14 Run Mode Select is set to Speed
Setpoint.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 96 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 117/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter allows the feeder to operate in remote at a fixed motor speed. It is normally
set to Frate Setpoint for normal control and when in this mode the controller responds to
the Analog input or Raise/Lower contacts. When Speed Setpoint is selected the motor
speed is fixed at the value specified in P03.13 Speed Setpoint and the controller does not
respond to either the analog input or the Raise/Lower contacts. Selecting Speed Setpoint is
similar to setting 196NT Setup 03 (Run Mode Select) to 5 (RPM Setpoint).
This parameter specifies the bulk material density in weight per volume. The value is rele-
vant during the very first startup of the feeder and in c ase the feeder doesn't have load cells
to deternine the belt load.
This parameter specifies the Load cell rated output. Both load cells must have the same
output value. Our normally use 3.000 mV/V load cells.
This parameter specifies the rated capacity of each load cell. Both load cells must have the
same capacity. Our normally use 100.0 Lbs (50 kg) load cells but smaller load cells may be
used for low capacity feeders or feeders with a short weigh span.
This parameter is normally set to 100.0 Lbs (50 kg). Check the project manual or certified
drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 97 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 118/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. Our use a
three roller weighing system with one weighing roller, supported by the load cells, and two
fixed weigh span rollers. In this configuration, one half of the weight between the weigh
span rollers is supported by the load cells and this parameter must be set to one half of the
distance between the weigh span rollers.
This parameter must be set to ½ the value of 196NT Setup 10 Weigh Span Length, normal-
ly 18 inches (45.7cm) on new feeder installations and 19.146 (48,6 cm) on mechanical
feeder conversions.
This parameter is used to specify the ratio of weigh on the load cell and total platform weigh
on multi weigh roller systems.
This parameter is used to specify the feeder inclination and is used to adjust the weight
signal when the load cell is mounted perpendicular to the belt on an inclined feeder. The
load cells in our are always mounted vertically, to eliminate weighing errors, and this ad-
justment is not necessary.
Alternative: DI
n/a
This parameter selects the digital input used for the tachometer input signal.
This parameter is normally set to DI 15 (terminal block X5-1 & X5-2) and is connected to
(wires 145 & 146).
Note: If DI 14 is selected, a NAMUR type sensor must be used, and connected to X5-3 &
X5-4.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 98 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 119/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: LC
n/a
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the left side of the
feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and
P02.06 Nominal Speed .
Alternative: LC
n/a
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the right side of
the feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and
P02.06 Nominal Speed .
This parameter specifies the number of pulses generated by the tachometer for each revo-
lution of the motor. It is similar to 196NT Setup 09 tachometer type.
This parameter is set based on the type or tachometer that is installed. In most (but not all)
cases, feeders that use a VFD control use a tachometer that produces 60 pulses per revo-
lution and feeders that use an Edd y Current Clutch use a tachometer that produces 12
pulses per revolution. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that
the proper value is selected.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 99 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 120/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the area under the inlet leveling bar.
This parameter is normally set to 157.0 square inches (1013 square cm). Check the project
specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
This parameter group specifies the actions to be taken when error conditions are detected.
Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter allows the DT-9 to force the feeder into volumetric mode in the event of a
weighing system failure. Volumetric mode is independent of the event generated in P05.02
Event: Volum. caused by LC-error .
The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a
weighing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing system.
Action to be taken:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 100 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 121/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the amount of time that the feeder continues to totalize after the
belt has stopped.
Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter is used to specify that the DT-9 should stop totalizing and set the weight
signal to zero when the load on the belt reaches a low limit specified by P05.05 Zero Drop-
Out Limit
Min: 0 % Q Max: 10 % Q
This parameter specifies the limit at which the weight signal will be set to zero and the DT-9
will stop totalizing if P05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active is set to YES.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 101 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 122/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt drive motor is stopped
because the motor demand signal is less than the limit specified in P06.02 Stand-By Limit
Value.
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter P06.02
Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
If the motor speed control (MSC) demand signal goes below the limit specified by this pa-
rameter, the required motor speed is set to zero and the motor start contact is de-
energized. There is a 3 second delay before the motor is stopped and no delay before it is
restarted.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is lost or
is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 102 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 123/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn device
off and restart.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condi-
tion will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 103 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 124/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this
condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
- Check material infeed.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand signal is
greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravimetric mode,
the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate or P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. In volu-
metric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 104 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 125/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after a
loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during normal
remote mode operation.
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization takes
place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
This parameter specifies the maximum time that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation before an error is
generated.
This parameter specifies the minimum amount that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint without generating an error. The error is generated after a delay specified
Min: 0 Max: 1
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 105 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 126/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter allows P06.10 Threshold Deviation to be adjusted based on the feedrate
setpoint. This allows the effective threshold to be reduced as the feedrate setpoint is re-
duced.
When P06.11 is set to 1.0 there is no adjustment and the effective threshold is always
equal to P06.10 Threshold Deviation. When P06.11 is set to 0.0 the effective deviation is
calculated by multiplying P06.10 Threshold Deviation by a factor equal to the (feedrate
setpoint) / (P02.05 (Nominal Flow Rate).
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can differ
from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation for a time
greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 106 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 127/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control demand
signal reaches its upper limit.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After some
time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed rate, Y
should be 10 to 14mA.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller detects an error in
the internal non-volatile memory. Reload the non-volatile memory by using the "Load
Default Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists, the controller must
be replaced.
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal para-
meters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all parameters
must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels must be re-
trimmed.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 107 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 128/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate demand
signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset ).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance space
of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted with noisy
input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
This parameter selects the digital output used to switch to the secondar y tachometer in a
dual tachometer system. The output is reset when the feeder is switched off.
This parameter should be set to n/a in a single tachometer system and DO 3 in a dual ta-
chometer system. DO 3 is norm ally used by P16.07 DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) which
must be set to not used.
Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during normal ope-
ration.
The parameters in this group control the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
P07.01 DI: Belt Motion Monitor Default: n/a
Alternative: n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 108 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 129/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter selects the digital input used for the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
This parameter is normally set to DI 12 - High (terminal block X4-2) and is connected to
wire 115.
Min: 0 s Max: 50 s
This parameter sets the maximum delay between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulses before
a BMM error (P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor ) is generated. It is the same as 196NT
Setup 17 (Belt Motion Monitor Delay). The interval is determined when the feeder is opera-
ting at its minimum design feed rate and is equal to the time necessary for the pulley or
roller which inputs the sensor to make one complete revolution, divided by two, plus ten
percent. Therefore, time intervals for motion monitors mounted to the tension roll or belt
take-up pulley will be considerably longer than those for sensors mounted to the weigh
span roller.
Example: If the motion monitor is mounted to the weigh span roller which make revolution
every 20 seconds at minimum feed rate, the time interval between pulses before the belt is
certain not to be moving is: 20 / 2 = 10 + 10% = 11.
Note: To disable this function if a belt motion monitor is not installed set P07.03 Event: Belt
Motion Monitor to IG.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor (BMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a BMM is installed. Setting it to IG (Ig-
nore) will disable the BMM feature.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
Alternative: n/a
DI
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 109 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 130/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The digital input for the belt sensor. This function can be checked with the corresponding
service value.
Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter is used to activate the Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) system. The BIC
system is used in batching feeders to tare individual sections of the belt separately so that
batches that are less then a full belt length are weighted accurately.
The BIC feature is not used in continuous feeding systems and this parameter should al-
ways be set to NO.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter is used to specify a digital input that is used to freeze the tare value while
Min: 0 % LB Max: 20 % LB
This parameter specifies the maximum amount that the belt speed measured by the belt
slip input can differ from belt speed measured by the tachometer input, without generating
an error.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 110 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 131/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the limit
specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter selects the digital output that is energized when the Belt Slip event is active.
Length of the metallic markings worked into the belt in the direction of belt travel.
Width of the metallic markings worked into the belt at right angles to the direction of belt
travel.
The zero point of recording the belt drift can be corrected with the offset. Unfortunately, this
restricts the maximum display zone. This is why greater differences should be calibrated by
mechanically shifting the sensor.
The new display = the old display - the offset
Threshold value for belt misalignment identification to generate an event message Event:
Belt Drift .
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 111 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 132/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Threshold of the belt drift for detection of event Event: Belt Skew .
Alternative: n/a
DO
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
Alternative: n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 112 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 133/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the time set
if there is an abrupt change in the signal.
Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display.
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate value displayed on
the display, EasyServe and field bus interface. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback
Signal Filter.
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate signal sent to the
analog output channel. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback Signal Filter.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 113 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 134/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt load signal sent to the
analog output channel.
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt speed signal sent to the
analog output channel.
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the deviation signal sent to the
analog output channel.
Note: Limit values are only checked after the feeder has been running for 10 seconds.
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum feedrate event is generated.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 114 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 135/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN .
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum feedrate event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal flow rate (P02.06).
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX .
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 60 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the nominal
flow rate and the nominal belt speed).
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 115 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 136/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN . Set this value to W2 to simulate the
196NT low density alarm.
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the nomi-
nal flow rate and the nominal belt speed).
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX .
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt speed event is generated.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 116 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 137/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN .
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt speed event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt speed (P02.06).
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN .
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
Min: 30 °C Max: 90 °C
Maximum allowed temperatur inside the VCU. W hen the actual temperature exceeds the
threshold event Event: Temperature-MAX is generated.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 117 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 138/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The event will be detected in case the actual temperature is above the threshold (P09.13
Temperature MAX ). The controller might fail to function.
Countermeasures:
- Check temperatur of environment
- Install cooler close to the controller
The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values that
have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No readjustment
is necessary.
This parameter specifies the distance between the two calibration probe bosses. It is the
same as the 196NT Setup 12 Calibration Probe Span
This parameter must match the physical characteristics of the feeder but in most cases, it is
set to 36 inches (91,5 cm) for new feeder installations or 38.7 inches (98,3 cm) on mecha-
nical weighing feeder conversions.
This parameter indicates the number of tachometer pulses per lenght unit of belt travel. It is
calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration process based on the time it takes for a calib-
ration tape to travel between the two calibration probes.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 118 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 139/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
dead weight calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the calib-
ration process based on the weigh s ystem characteristics specified in Parameter Group 4,
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Group 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
chain calibration (TC: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration
process based on the weigh system characteristics specified in Parameter Block 4, and on
the test chain weight specified in P10.09 Test Chain Weight .
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
This parameter specifies the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
material test. It is calculated by the operator based on the difference between the totalized
value, indicated by the DT-9, and the actual value, determined by an external static scale.
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 119 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 140/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the duration of the LB: Pulse/Belt calibration process. This pro-
cess counts the number of tachom eter pulses received during the specified time and place
the result in P10.11 Belt Circuit No..
This parameter specifies the duration, in belt revolutions, of the TC: Span Calibration pro-
cess. This process performs a span calibration using P10.09 Test Chain Weight as the
calibration weight, and places the result in P10.04 Range Correction TC .
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration weight used during the span portion of
a feeder calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is the same as the 196NT Setup 13 Calibrati-
on Weight
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration chain used when a chain calibration
(TC: Span Calibration) is preformed. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 36 Test Chain Weight
This parameter indicates the weight of the empty belt. It is calculated by the DT-9 during
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 120 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 141/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter indicates the total number of tachometer pulses in one complete belt revo-
lution. It is calculated by the DT-9 during the tare portion of the calibration process (BS:
Tare/Belt Speed).
The parameters in this group are used to control the operation of the Motor Speed Control (MSC).
This parameter specifies the proportional gain of the speed control loop. Increasing this
value produces a faster response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation. Redu-
cing this value increases stability but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN .
This parameter specifies the integral gain of the speed control loop. The value specified
here is the reciprocal of the actual gain value. Decreasing this parameter produces a faster
response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation and increasing it increases stabi-
lity but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN .
Alternative: AO
n/a
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 121 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 142/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the analog output channel used to control the Motor Speed Con-
trol (MSC).
This parameter is normally set to AO 1 (terminal blocks X6-7 and X6-6) and is connected to
wires 142 through 144.
Min: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
This parameter determines the lower limit of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand sig-
nal. It should always be set to the same value as P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset .
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
Min: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 100% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA and 0-10V input.
Min: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 0% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should always be set to the sam e value as P11.04 Lower Limit .
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
This parameter specifies the value of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal (see
P11.03 Controller Magnitude Y) when the belt drive motor is not running.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 122 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 143/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the speed control gain used during the volumetric startup period.
Alternative: NO
YES
When this parameter is set to YES the feedrate and total calculations are time shifted to
adjust for the delay between the time that the material is weighed and the time that it is
discharged.
This
ders.feature is useful
It should alwayswhen
be setsmall batches are being delivered but is not used on Stock fee-
to NO.
Min: 0 % LB Max: 50 % LB
This parameter specifies the distance between the center of the weigh platform and the
material discharge point in percentage of total belt length.
This parameter is only used when P11.09 VAP Active is set to YES. It should always be set
to 0.0% Lb.
Relation of control output to resulting frequency of the tachometer. This value is determined
by the adjustment programm Basic (Cal1). The value takes effect during the volumetic star-
tup phase of the controller after power recovery only.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 123 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 144/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Min: 0 mA Max: 20 mA
The constant for the setpoint bypass (also refer to the controller figure in the appendix). The
bypass instantaneously passes on a portion of the flow rate setpoint to the controller magni-
tude to the feed drive. This parameter contains the current at which the prefeeder just supp-
lies the nominal flow rate (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate).
Setting: operate the feeder volumetrically and set the bypass so that actual flow rate = set-
point. This value should be approximately 10 ... 15 mA. Otherwise the external flow rate
controller should be adjusted.
The time constant for a second filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the b y-
pass.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 124 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 145/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: NO
V
1/Q
1/W
The adaption means that the controller can be adapted to variable route reinforcements or
the guidance behavior can be improved.
Alternative: NO
W
Regulated adaptation of the controller output.
Alternatives: NO, W
This parameter is used to activate the moisture compensation system. At present Stock
does not supply moisture measurement equipment and these parameters should always be
disabled.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 125 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 146/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
AI
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture con-
tent.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 126 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 147/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DO
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P12.09 DO: Moisture MAX , P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX
Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has
exceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P12.08 Moisture MAX , P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by P12.08
Moisture MAX .
Alternative: n/a
AO
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 127 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 148/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P12.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset , P12.13 AO: Flow Rate Range
Alternative: NO
YES
Alternative: n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 128 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 149/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to energize the cleanout conveyor motor
starter when the cleanout timer feature is enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor ON time when the cleanout timer feature is
enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor OFF time when the cleanout timer feature
is enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
This parameter sets the maximum delay between Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulses be-
fore a CMM error (P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor ) is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 20 sec. To disable this function if a CMM is not installed
set P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor to IG.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 129 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 150/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ignore) if
not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels.
Alternative: n/a
AO
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Setpoint: The Setpoint value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently attempting to meet.
The source of the setpoint signal is determined by P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint . The analog
output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 130 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 151/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: AO
n/a
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
Alternative: n/a
AO
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Belt Load: The Belt Load value is the current weight of material on the belt per unit length.
The analog output is scaled to the nominal belt load, which is calculated using P02.05 No-
minal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Speed .
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 131 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 152/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
AO
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Speed: The Speed value is the current belt speed. The analog output is scaled to P02.06
Nominal Speed .
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
Alternative: n/a
AO
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Deviation: The Setpoint value indicates the amount that the actual feedrate deviates from
the feedrate setpoint.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 132 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 153/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
AO
This parameter is used when a second analog output proportional to feedrate is required. A
second analog output card is required and is normally installed in position A10. In this case
both parameter P01.03 Analog Channel A10 and P14.16 AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd) must
be set to AO 3.
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
Alternative: n/a
AO
See also:
P14.17 AO: Density
P14.19 Density Range
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 133 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 154/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Output signal for measured density = rated density. Not to physically limit the output at the
rated density, P14.17 should be set below 20 mA.
See also:
P14.17 AO: Density
Service value Nominal Density
The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input chan-
nels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired on
the controller and cannot be changed.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely acknowledge error conditions.
This function is not normally used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the VMO is in local mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should always be set to n/a (not used).
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 134 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 155/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.04 DI:
External Event 1 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 ) is acti-
ve.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 1.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 1. The totalizer is
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 135 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 156/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 2. The totalizer is
reset on the rising edge of the signal.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the discharge pluggage switch (LSFD). It
is internally programmed as a failsafe input. When the parameter is set to HIGH, open
contact (low signal) on the input will produce an event.
This parameter is normally set to DI 5 – High (terminal block X2-4) and is connected to wire
109.
Min: 0 s Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a discharge pluggage is detected
and the time that the discharge pluggage event is generated. It is the same as Setup 16
(Discharge Pluggage Delay) on the 196NT.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 136 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 157/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is detec-
ted.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the feeder dischar-
ge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
Alternative: DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Coal on belt switch (LSFB),
This parameter is normally set to DI 7 – High (terminal block X3-6) and is connected to wire
108 if a coal on belt switch is installed on the feeder. It can be set to n/a (not use) to disable
the coal on belt input.
Min: 0 s Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material on the belt is
detected (coal on belt switch is inactive) and the time that the Loss of material event is ge-
nerated. It is the same as Setup 39 (Loss of Flow Delay) on the 196NT.
Note: The loss of flow event can be disabled by setting P15.14 Event: Loss of Material to
IG (Ignore).
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 137 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 158/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is detected
(coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while running in
Remote.
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run in
Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running in local
or calibrate mode.
This parameter specifies the source for the feedback signal when a loss of material (coal on
belt switch is inactive) on the belt is detected. If it is set to Prop to Rate, the feedback signal
always follows the actual feedrate value; if it is set to Low Lim if Empty, the feedback signal
is set to zero when a loss of material is detected (coal on belt switch is inactive). It is similar
to Setup 24 – (Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive) on the 196NT.
Note: This parameter should always be set to Low Lim. If Empty when the DT-9 is used on
a volumetric feeder.
Alternative: DI
n/a
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 138 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 159/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the motor speed control has
been energized.
This parameter is normally set to DI 4 – High (terminal block X2-6) and is connected to wire
110.
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback signal
(P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the controller.
Alternative: DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the coal flow monitor has
detected a loss of flow.
This parameter is normally set to DI 10 – High (terminal block X4-7) and is connected to
wire 116.
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material flow is indicated
by the coal flow monitor (P15.19) and the time that the Coal Flow Error event is generated.
It is specified in units of weight so that a head seal can be maintained regardless of the
feedrate. It is similar to Setup 18 (Level/Temperature Sensor Delay) on the 196NT.
This parameter is normally set to 100 lbs (50 kg) to provide a quick response without nu-
isance trips.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 139 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 160/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material flow is
detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed and
IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout above
the feeder.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Remote mode.
This parameter is normally set to DI 1 – High (terminal block X1-6) and is connected to wire
118.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Off mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 140 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 161/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Local mode.
Attention: This input start the belt drive!
This parameter is normally set to DI 9 – High (terminal block X3-2) and is connected to wire
119.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
to Keyboard & Local or Keyboard, Remote & Local.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder forward.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder in reverse.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.29 DI:
External Event 2 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 2 (see P15.29) is enabled, and external event 2 input (see P15.28 ) is acti-
ve.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 141 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 162/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 2.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.31 DI:
External Event 3 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 3 (see P15.31) is enabled, and external event 3 input (see P15.30 ) is acti-
ve.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 3.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 142 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 163/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.33 DI:
External Event 4 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 4 (see P15.33) is enabled, and external event 4 input (see P15.32 ) is acti-
ve.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 4.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter defines the digital input to force the feed rate control into volumetric mode.
The beltspeed is not influenced by the beltload in volumetric control operation.
Alternative: n/a
DI
Definition of the input signal that prevents modem switching (Remote <-> Off/Service) using
the VHM keyboard. The signal can be given by i.e. a key switch.
Alternative: DO
n/a
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 143 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 164/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder.
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (Not used).
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running. This
output is a duplicate of P16.02 DO: Feeder Started .
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder running forward. This
output is similar to the K6 relay on the 196 NT.
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the second digital output used to start the feeder running forward.
This output is a duplicate of P16.04 DO: Feeder Run Forward .
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 144 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 165/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder in reverse. This output is
similar to the K2 relay on the 196 NT.
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter
output specifies
is a duplicate the second
of P16.06 digital Run
DO: Feeder output used to
Reverse . start the feeder in reverse. This
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the pre-feeder.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is similar to the K1 relay on the 196 NT.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 1 – Low to simulate the K1 failsafe function of the 196NT.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 145 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 166/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is a duplicate of P16.09 DO: ALARM .
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a deviation event is active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low flow rate event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high flow rate event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 146 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 167/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt load event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt load event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt speed event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt speed event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 147 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 168/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is similar to the K4 relay on the 196 NT.
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is a duplicate of P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in VMO Mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W1 or W 2). This output is similar to the K7 relay on the 196 NT.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 8 – Low to simulate the K7 failsafe function of the 196NT.
Alternative: n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 148 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 169/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W1 or W2). This output is a duplicate of P16.21 DO: WARNING.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is run-
ning and there is material on the belt. This output is similar to the K5 relay on the 196 NT.
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is run-
ning and there is material on the belt. This output is a duplicate of P16.23 DO: Feeding .
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
Alternative: DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote mo-
de. This output is similar to the Kx relay on the 196 NT.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 149 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 170/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote mo-
de. This output is a duplicate of P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
The parameters in this group are used to trim the analog output values. They can be set manually but they are
normally set using the Analog Trim Function.
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
See section Analog Trim Function.
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 150 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 171/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 151 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 172/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 152 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 173/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Min: 17 mA Max: 23 mA
Min: 0 mA Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termi-
nation of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
Min: 0 mA Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termi-
nation of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
Min: 0 mA Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termi-
nation of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
Min: 0 mA Max: 23 mA
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 153 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 174/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termi-
nation of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
Min: 0 mA Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termi-
nation of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
Min: 0 mA Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termi-
nation of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
Alternative: NO
YES
Alternative: Speed
DI
This parameter specifies the type of input used for the first of the two sensors used in slip
detection.
Alternative: n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 154 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 175/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the first slip sensor. It is only active if
P18.02 Source Sensor 1 is set to DI.
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the first slip sensor generates in one
inch (or cm) of belt travel.
Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the second slip sensor.
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the second slip sensor generates in one
inch (cm) of belt travel.
This parameter specifies the minimum difference between the two sensors (in percent of
total belt length, LB) required to generate a belt slip event.
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sensor 2
(P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2 .
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 155 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 176/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output that is activated when a belt slippage event is
generated.
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the DT-9 is powered.
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the belt drive motor is energized.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 156 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 177/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval elapsed, a
message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required.
The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
This parameter specifies the time that the hourly total is saved to the total data logging
system. It is the same as Setup 37 (Hourly total time) on the 196NT.
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P20.04 ... P20.13.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 157 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 178/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in
the 'data communication' manual.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 158 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 179/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
The parameters in this group control serial communication between EasyServe and the DT-9.
Note: EasyServe is normally connected using Ethernet and these param eters are not used.
P21.01 Own Address Default: 1
Min: 1 Max: 1
This parameter specifies the serial loop address of the DT-9. This address and baud rates
(see below) much match the address specified in EasyServe.
Note: The station address is designed for systems with Service bus. If Service bus is not
used, select address 1.
Alternative: 38400
This parameter specifies the baud rate used for serial communication with EasyServe.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 159 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 180/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: 8-N-1
This parameter specifies the communications protocol used for serial communication
between EasyServe and the DT-9.
The parameters in this group are used to control the various types of fieldbus communications that are sup-
ported by the DT-9. Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
Alternative: NO
Modbus-RTU
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Modbus-TCP
PROFINET IO
Ethernet/IP
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card. Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual BV-H2406. The
manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communication' (BV-H2468) contains further information
on the data structures.
NO: MODBUS/TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
MODBUS: Modbus RTU protocol; RS232-, RS422- or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface
card VSS 28020 must be installed.
A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in
P22.02 is greater than zero.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 160 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 181/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been interrup-
ted for longer than the timeout-period in P22.02.
Alternative: I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 161 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 182/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
FIXED_8_8
FIXED_4_4
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
FIXED COMPATIBLE
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a detai-
led description in the manuals for data communication:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
The contents of the data have to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is
compatible to one another!
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value transfer-
red.
The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
Alternative: 9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 162 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 183/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: 8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
N = No parity
O = Odd parity
E = Even parity
Alternative: RS485-2-wire
RS485-4-wire
RS232
Alternative: IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parame-
ters.
Min: 0 Max: 63
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 163 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 184/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: 125K
250K
500K
Alternative: NO
YES
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
Min: 2 Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order
plant control system.
Min: 0 Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales → master) that are
queried in a telegram.
Alternative: NO
FIRST WRITE
REMOTE IP
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 164 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 185/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a
controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights.
The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P22.21
Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
Alternative: PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 165 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 186/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This parameter should be set to the default value of 192.168.240.1 for normal communica-
tion with EasyServe and the (optional) touch screen display.
This parameter specifies the network gate way used to connect the DT-9.
This parameter group is used to specify analog and digital output channels that are under Fieldbus control.
Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Alternative: n/a
DO
Corresponds to P24.01 DO: PLC 1
Alternative: n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 166 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 187/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DO
Alternative: n/a
DO
Corresponds to P24.01 DO: PLC 1
Alternative: n/a
DO
Alternative: n/a
DO
Alternative: n/a
AO
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 167 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 188/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the Fieldbus telegram. It can-
not be changed in this parameter.
The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the 'data com-
munication' manual:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 168 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 189/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The
number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 169 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 190/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 170 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 191/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 171 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 192/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.
Alternative: n/a
AO
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
Alternative: n/a
AO
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 172 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 193/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
Alternative: n/a
AO
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 173 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 194/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
Alternative: n/a
AO
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 174 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 195/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
Description see:
P26.01
P26.02 FCB_AO 01
Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
Alternative: n/a
AO
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 175 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 196/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
Name of the required function block link. This name is automatically transferred to the pa-
rameter when a new link is loaded. When the system is started after turning on the voltage,
it checks to see whether the name of the function block link loaded is the same as the
name entered in the parameter. Event P26.22 Event: FCB-Error is identified if the names
are different.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 176 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 197/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link
stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states
may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P26.21 FCB Variant . No further
links can be loaded as long as this event is identified. If in this error state a link with a dif-
ferent name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into P26.21.
This parameter group is used to associate Function Block digital outputs with physical I/O points. Contact us for
a detailed description of Function Control Blocks.
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 177 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 198/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 178 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 199/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 179 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 200/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation map in
the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data communica-
tion:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 180 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 201/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 181 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 202/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Parameters
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 182 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 203/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.
Alarm A All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1 W1 The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2 W2 The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been cor-
rected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore IG Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Sequence monitoring SC
Electrical system WE
Mechanical system WM
Interlocking IL
Controllers CO
Calibration CA
Maximum HI
Minimum LO
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 183 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 204/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Note: In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the load cell signal is inva-
lid. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder
into volumetric mode, regardless of the value selected here.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn
device off and restart.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is
lost or is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 184 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 205/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during nor-
mal operation.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control
demand signal reaches its upper limit.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed
rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA.
The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a
weighing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing sys-
tem.
Action to be taken:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 185 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 206/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after
a loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during
normal remote m ode operation.
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization
takes place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate de-
mand signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset ).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance
space of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted
with noisy input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 186 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 207/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the
Run Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run
Enable feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be
set to DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This
switch is used to stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or disconnect-
ed.
Action:
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT displa y and
in this case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the
link stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating
states may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P26.21 FCB Variant . No
further links can be loaded as long as this event is identified. If in this error state a
link with a different name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into
P26.21.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 187 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 208/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by
P12.08 Moisture MAX .
The event will be detected in case the actual temperature is above the threshold
(P09.13 Temperature MAX ). The controller might fail to function.
Countermeasures:
- Check temperatur of environment
- Install cooler close to the controller
The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the
Total Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can oper-
ate. See parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a small-
er value.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 188 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 209/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell sig-
nals is greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is
set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX .
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX .
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 189 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 210/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN .
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can
differ from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Devia-
tion for a time greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the
limit specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 190 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 211/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is
detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sen-
sor 2 (P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2 .
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor
(CMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ig-
nore) if not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 191 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 212/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is
detected.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disa-
ble the discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the f eeder
discharge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is
lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is de-
tected (coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disa-
ble the Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while
running in Remote.
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback
signal (P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the
controller.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 192 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 213/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor
(BMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material
flow is detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed
and IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout
above the feeder.
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run
in Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running
in local or calibrate mode.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 193 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 214/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell sig-
nals is less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to
YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value
selected here.
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN .
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN . Set this value to W2 to simu-
late the 196NT low density alarm.
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN .
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 194 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 215/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand sig-
nal is greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravi-
metric mode, the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate or P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate . In volumetric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter
P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval
elapsed, a message is output. This m essage simply informs you that service work is
required.
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 195 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 216/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.04 DI: External Event 1 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 )
is active.
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.29 DI: External Event 2 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 2 (see P15.29) is enabled, and external event 2 input (see P15.28 )
is active.
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.31 DI: External Event 3 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 3 (see P15.31) is enabled, and external event 3 input (see P15.30 )
is active.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 196 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 217/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.33 DI: External Event 4 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 4 (see P15.33) is enabled, and external event 4 input (see P15.32 )
is active.
The
errorparameter selects
in the internal the errormemory.
non-volatile conditionReload
generated when the controller
the non-volatile memorydetects an
by using
the "Load Default Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists,
the controller must be replaced.
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal
parameters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all pa-
rameters must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels
must be re-trimmed.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch
screen HMI must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located
toward the center of the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 197 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 218/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P22.02.
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not
operate when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 198 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 219/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DI 1 X1-6 118 P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL Not normally used. P03.12 must be set to
Keyboard Only or Keyboard & Local if this
point is reallocated.
DI 2 X1-4 112 P03.01 Feeder Start Start contact from customer DCS
DI 3 X1-2 113 P03.07 DI: Raise Setpoint Not Normally used. Must be enabled when
P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint is set to R-L.
DI 4 X2-6 110 P15.17 DI: Motor feedback Running contact from motor speed control
DI 5 X2-4 109 P15.09 DI: Discharge Pluggage Limit Switch Feeder Discharge (LSFD)
DI 7 X3-6 108 P15.12 DI: Coal on belt switch Limit Switch Feeder Belt (LSFB)
DI 8 X3-4 111 P03.10 Source Run Enable Must be enabled when (optional) touch
screen HMI is used.
DI 9 X3-2 119 P15.25 DI: Local Start Not normally used. P03.12 must be set to
Keyboard Only if this point is reallocated.
DI 10 X4-7 116 P15.19 DI: Coal Flow Monitor Set P15.21 Event: Coal Flow to A, W1 or
W2 to enable the coal flow monitor or IG to
disable it.
DI 11 X4-5 114 P03.08 DI: Lower Setpoint Not Normally used. Must be enabled when
P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint is set to R-L.
DI 12 X4-2 115 P07.01 DI: Belt Motion Monitor Set P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor to A,
W1 or W2 to enable the belt motion monitor
or IG to disable it.
DI 13 X5-5 n/a P07.01 DI: Belt Motion Monitor NAMUR BMM input
X5-6
DI 14 X5-3 n/a P04.06 Speed Measurement NAMUR Tachometer input
X5-4
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 199 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 220/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DI 15 X5-1 145 P04.06 Speed Measurement Can only be used for tachometer input.
X5-2 146
DO 4 X11-4 thru 162-164 P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL Feeder is ready for normal (remote) operation.
X11-6
DO 5 X13-1 thru 165-167 P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode Weigh system error. Feeding in volumetric
X13-3 mode.
DO 6 X13-4 thru 171-173 P16.23 DO: Feeding Running in Remote with coal on the belt.
X13-6
X15-6
DO 11 X16-1 7, 8 P16.01 DO: Scale Start
X16-2
DO 12 X16-3 thru 186-189 P02.12 DO: Pulse Counter Pulsed based on amount of coal delivered.
X16-6
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 200 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 221/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
DO 13 X6-1 134, 135 P02.17 DO: FRI Frequency Frequency signal proportional to feedrate.
X6-2
AI 1 X6-3 Sig +, Sig- P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint Customer Demand Signal
X6-4
AO 1 X6-8 142-144 P11.03 AO: Motor Speed
X6-9 Control
AO 2 X6-7 139-141 P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Customer Feedback Signal
X6-8
X12-8
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 201 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 222/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 223/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Trending Data
13 Trending Data
This item lists the most important data addresses available with the trending display.
1878 Totalizer 3 lb
1904 Deviation %
1906 Moisture %
1950 Tachometer 1 Hz
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 203 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 224/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Trending Data
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
- 204 - November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 225/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Trending Data
3
2292 Density lb/ft
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 205 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 226/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 227/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
14 Appendix
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 207 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 228/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The controller magnitude is specified to the controller in the OFF/Maint operating mode by P02.16 in percent of
the range that is defined by P11.06 and P11.05.
OP The keyboard for the VHM or EasyServe op- P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value
erator panel
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 208 November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 229/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Belt operation is started in the OFF/Maint operating mode from the operator panel or EasyServe by pressing the
RUN <<, RUN >>, STOP , JOG << and JOG << buttons or with the set-up program. In addition, P15.26 and
P15.27 can be used to configure input signals for connecting buttons to have the belt run forwards and back-
wards.
The locking signal from the downstream process is ignored. ALARM switches the drive off. The R-FB report
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group BV-H6411GB, 1221
November 2013 - 209 -
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 230/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 210 November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 231/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
UBALI
+
P04.02 X P04.04
P04.01 X P04.03 X cos(P04.05) P09.11
P10.03 HI04
L004
P1o.os-. P09.09
P08.06
+
P10.10 ---- )
P08.05
P09.07 ro +---()9.-+----1
HI03
L003
P09.05
P12.xx
Q
P09.03
P08.02
HI02
L002
BV-H6411GB, 1221
Schenck Process Group - 211 -
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 232/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
UBAL! Event: Significantly uneven load on load cells P04.08 Source Load Cell 2
1 and 2 (refer to controller operating modes
for instructions).
BIC Belt Influence Compensation: P08.03 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
Belt Influence Compensation
CTRL Feed rate controller P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 212 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 233/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
S3 Totalizer 3
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 234/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 214 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 235/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
LIM Limit
Speed
reached
The Q0 rated belt load in units of weight per length is calculated according to the following regulation:
▪ If the load is measured (P04.07 and P04.08 unequal n/a):
Q0 = P02.05 / P02.06
▪ If the load is not measured (P04.07 and P04.08 equal n/a):
Q0 = P03.15 / P04.10
General Diagram
The PI controller is of the model
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 236/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the fol-
lowing diagram.
Fig. 7: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0
KP P-portion of the feed rate controller related to the nominal feed rate as a % / %
or a dimensionless P-portion of the speed controller.
TN Reset time in seconds.
Tab. 6 : Controller parameters
Types of operation
Gravimetric The feeder is switched on and at least 40 s of The actual feed rate is controlled to the setpoint
voltage switched on. No condition for volumetric and paying attention to the values measured for
operating modes belt load and speed.
P03.14 = Frate
Volumetric Synchro- ▪ The No Coal on the Belt transmitter has re- ▪ Display: gravimetric operation
nous sponded or ▪ Volumetric output is not activated
▪ the volumetric control command is specified ▪ The actual feed rate is calculated from the
from outside speed and the belt load value ascertained
▪
P03.14 = Frate just before the event occurs and then con-
trolled
▪ Issuing the gravimetric feed rate and calculat-
ing the integration of the totalized amount of
material as in gravimetric operation
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 216 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 237/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Volumetric through The difference in measuring results for the load ▪ Display: volumetric operation
errors cells on the right-hand and left-hand side of the ▪ Volumetric output is activated
▪
feeder is greater than 25% or the load cells are The actual
speed and feed rate is
belt load calculated
value from the
ascertained over
underloaded or overloaded
the last hour before the error occurred and
P03.14 = Frate
then controlled
▪ The totalized amount of material is added up
in the meter for the volumetric totalized
amount of material, not in the meter for the
gravimetric totalized amount of material.
Fixed speed P03.14 = Speed Setpoint ▪ Feeding at the speed as set in P03.13
Speed controlled P04.07 and P04.08 equal to n/a Target belt speed
P03.14 = Frate = target feed rate / Q0
with:
Q0 = P03.15 / P04.10
Standby The controller magnitude is below the limit set by The external drive is turned off to protect the
P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value motor and feed rate controller and starts automat-
ically when the controller magnitude is in excess
of the limit. It continues to report that the Feeder
is Running to the plant control system.
Zero drop out The belt load drops below the limit set by P05.05 The load is set to zero to ensure that small tare
Zero Drop-Out Limit . errors do not cause the integration of the totalized
amount of material to continue with longer run-
ning.
Tab. 8 : Special modes of operation
The upper limit of the controller magnitude can be reduced to prevent excess feeding of hazardous substances
at a low target feed rate.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 238/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
.
This figure shows an example of the correlation for three selected settings of the MX parameter.
A sensor is mounted on a roll that rotates when the belt moves. That might be an idler or the tail pulleys that are
not driven. After turning on the scale, it monitors to make sure that the signal of the sensor changes within the
time set in P07.02. Then the assumption is made that the belt is moving.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 218 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 239/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 240/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The smallest measurable slip S_MIN is the larger of the values A and B:
A = 2 * 100 * vs /(P_U *S1C)
B = 2 * 100 * vs /(P_U *S2C)
Example
vs = 10000
P_U = 30000
S1C = S2C = 100
S_MIN = 0.667%
If P18.07 < S_MIN: S_MIN has an effect
Note
The impulses and pauses between impulses to S1 and S2 have to be at least 1.2 s long. If digital inputs are
used on the first VCU of a scale, the impulse and pause have to be at least 0.2 s long.
14.6 Belt drift and slip identification via mark in the belt
Prerequisite: A belt is used with an integrated mark (triangle). The parameters in the Belt Monitoring block
should be adjusted.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 220 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 241/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
T The mark (triangle) in the belt Le The length of the triangle (P07.10 )
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 242/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The length (T) of the signal (-t1 or +t2) changes if the belt drifts to one side. Event: Belt Drift is first identified at
low drainage and Event: Belt Skew is identified at greater drainage depending upon the size of the triangle.
P07.12 can be used to finely adjust the position of the sensor in relation to the triangle according to the mechan-
ical setting so that a Belt Drift service value is shown that is equal to zero if the belt is in the middle position.
Note
Monitoring needs two complete belt revolutions after starting feeding for synchronisation. Events are not identi-
fied during this period.
FLOW- Monitoring the flow of bulk solids in the feed P15.19 DI: Coal Flow Monitor
M area
LSFB The sensor for bulk solids on the belt P15.12 DI: Coal on belt switch
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 222 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 243/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Other monitoring signale can be activated for electrical and mechanical malfunctions with the Digital Inputs pa-
rameter block.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 244/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 245/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The signal must be connected to a digital output via
P27.01 'FCB_DO 01' to enable physical output.
Note: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN must be installed on the PC to allow working with function
blocks.
WARNING
Possible loss of functions after replacing the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded it will be necessary to store it sepa-
rately in EasyServe. If the VCU is replaced then both the parameters and the
function block links must be loaded separately in order to restore full functionali-
ty. Alternatively the additional tool DISOPLAN, that contains both the parame-
ters and the function block links, can be used to make a complete backup.
However, this backup can then no longer be used with an updated version of
the scales program.
It is not necessary in a system with the 'Empty' link (see Cleaning the Screen and Information) to reload the link
after a VCU replacement as no functions are expanded using function blocks.
Loading the function software or loading factory settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have any
impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is maintained. Any loaded
link cannot be deleted; it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be overwritten with
a new link that has to contain at least one block.
A loaded link does not have any effect on scale operation as long as the outputs for the link are not coupled to
the scale software with the corresponding P26.01 to P27.20 parameters.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 246/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
1 Binary inputs 20 Process variable as per the descrip- Connection between the function block
'GP-DIn' tion of the fieldbus data interface logic and the function of the standard
program
2 Binary output 20 - Makes output signals available. Con-
'GP-Dout' nect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
5 Pulse generator 1 Time for the pulse The timer has three outputs that supply
'Time' an pulse of 0.1 seconds duration at the
time set.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 226 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 247/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
9 Delay 8 Delay time in seconds Delays the input signal by the specified
'Delay' time
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 248/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
3 Comparator 6 Upper and lower com- Supplies the value 'True' if the input signal lies outside
'Comparator' parative value of the threshold values.
4 'Limit' 10 Upper and lower thresh- Limits the input signal and becomes 'True' if limitation
old value arises.
9 Counter 6 Start value Supplies the numbered input pulses at the output
'Counter'
12 Constant 5 Value of the constants Supplies the numerical value to the output
'Constant'
13 Offset 10 Dividend
'Offset' Divisor
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 228 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 249/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
usually
complexa cabling
fieldbus. Fewbe
must wires
doneare
to used
allowto transmit
the the data
exchange serially.
of a lot The advantages
of signals, of thistomethod
that it is resistant are that
interference, less
it is
reliable and guarantees that the signals are transmitted accurately.
Different fieldbus systems are used in the DISOCONT Tersus system because of the varying specifications of
the communications behavior. As all of these systems are based on open standards, we wish to refer you to the
standards in question for a complete technical description. This section will explain only a few of the more com-
monly needed technical details of the bus systems in question.
In order to structure clearly the tasks of the communication system it has been separated into layers that are
based on each other, some of which are subject to different standards. The following table lists a selection
of terms from different layers.
http Protocol layer for the VHM operating panel and for an alter-
native web browser
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 250/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
14.11.1 Ethernet Hardware
Ethernet networks are today implemented in a star topology with a switch as the node. The DISOCONT Tersus
basic unit VCU has its own switch with 5 ports, so that each VCU can be considered to be a node. One of the
ports is connected to the weighing processor and the other four are available for external connections.
Fig. 16: Alternative 'series connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 230 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 251/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Fig. 17: Alternative 'star connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet
The VCUs are connected to the switch by a category 5e network cable at the RJ45 socket on the VCU. The
maximum length of the cable is 100 m. Intermediary switches or routers or optic fiber converters can be used to
make longer connections.
The ethernet switch of the central unit only (= unit on which the scales software is installed) is available for ex-
ternal connection in systems in which several VCUs have been assigned to one scales. The ethernet ports of the
other VCU units (software VIO xxxxx) are not served.
The manufacturer of any device that can be connected to the ethernet assigns that device a MAC address unique
in the world and unalterable. It forms the basis of physical communication between two subscribers. Ad- dresses
in the IP protocol (IP address) were introduced to simplify the administration of small and of very large networks
(WWW). Routers and switches decode the IP address and transmit the message to the subscriber with the
corresponding MAC address. Subscribers in a subnetwork delimited by a router can be reached by means of a
broadcast command to all subscribers. This allows subscribers in subnetworks to be found.
14.11.1.1.2 IP Addressing
Every subscriber in a (sub)network must have a unique address that has been assigned once only. As opposed
to office networks, addresses in industrial control networks are assigned permanently as the subscribers in the
network seldom change.
The ethernet address setting consists of the components:
▪
IP Address
▪ Subnetwork Mask
▪ Gateway Address
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 252/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
14.11.1.1.3 IP Address
Unique address of the subscriber in the subnetwork. The bits of the address labeled by the subnetwork mask
must be identical for all subnetwork subscribers. Subscriber addresses in the subnetwork must differ at those
parts in the address which have the value zero in the subnetwork mask.
This mask determines the addressable range of a subnetwork. All subscribers in a subnetwork must have ad-
dresses that coincide in those bits that have the value 1 in the subnetwork mask.
For example:
Subnetwork mask: 255.255.255.0
Corresponds in binary to: 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
In this example, all subscribers in the subnetwork must have addresses that coincide in the upper 24 bits. The
distinction is made in the lower 8 bits so that 255 subscriber addresses in this subnetwork can be addressed.
14.11.1.1.5 Gateway
Information addressed to subscribers with addresses outside of the range determined by the subnetwork mask
are reached through the gateway. As no subscribers outside of the subnetwork are addressed in self-contained
industrial control networks, the gateway address is usually left at the default setting 0.0.0.0.
The addresses of the subscribers in a network intended for process control tasks are generally permanent. Even
in the event that the equipment is not integrated into a network, we urgently advise giving adjacent equipment
different IP addresses in the same subnet. Otherwise, there might be problems in the PC network configuration if
the cable connection is jacked to the PC so that it will not be possible to establish communication (for instance,
via service tools such as EasyServe or DISOPLAN) until the PC has adapted its configuration to the modified
environment.
The keyboard is used to set the address in the DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel. Either a VHM operat-
ing panel or the PC-based service tool EasyServe is required in order to set the address of the central unit VCU.
Changing the address in a running system can cause complete loss of communication, also to oth-
er partners! To make sure, the address should only be set when the plant briefly allows an interrup-
tion in communication.
The address is set using the DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel as follows:
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 232 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 253/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Yes No
Has an IP address been already assigned or cleared Use the factory default addresses:
for the VHM operating panel? VCU(s): Address 192.168.240.001
(The address for the VCU must anyway have been VHM: Address 192.168.240.021
already determined in the user-side network)
Subnetwork mask: 255.255.255.000
Establish a connection between the VCU
and the VHM in the same subnetwork.
The easiest method is to plug a cable
from the operating panel directly into the
VCU.
Yes No
Connect
operatingthe VHM
panel and
the central unit VCU
to the same network.
Continue with step 2.
Select the VCU to be set and enter the IP address (VCU parameter).
The address of the central unit VCU is set with the PC-based service tool analogously to the method with the
operating panel VHM. It may be necessary to adapt the network configuration of the PC. This generally requires
administrator rights on the PC.
14.11.2 RS-485 Hardware
Several VCU control units assigned to one scales can be connected to each other by RS-485 interfaces. A VHM
operating panel can also be connected to a VCU for communication across long distances. The same interface
hardware is also used by some forms of the interface to the plant-side controller. The three connections men-
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 254/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
tioned may not be connected to each other in the DISOCONT Tersus. For this reason the VCU has three sepa-
rate interfaces for the different communication tasks.
To avoid electrical reflections on the transmission cable, each of the cable ends - and these only - must be ter-
minated with a resistance. The cabling of an RS-485 network should therefore be made in one link, though short
distribution feeders are permitted.
The total length of cable in a network is maximum 1000 m.
The bus termination resistances in the DISOCONT Tersus system are integrated into the VCU and VHM com-
ponents and can be connected using a jumper if required.
The two data wires in the cable used are a twisted pair cable and are individually screened. Further lines, e.g. to
supply a peripheral instrument, can also be included in the cable.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 234 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 255/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
There are several slits beneath each cable lead-through. The cable clamps will press the cable screen against
the shielding plate if they are inserted into these slits. This will correctly earth the screening. M-shaped slits can
also be used as pull relief for cable binders.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 256/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
14.12.2 Screened Cables
The screen of screened cables in generally connected at both ends to GND with a broad-contact connection.
The DISOCONT Tersus is supplied with mounting plates that have an appropriate contact surface in the area
around the cable feed. The outer sheathing is removed from the cables and the cables are then clamped with
the special screen clamps against the contact surface. The screen shielding braid can also be attached to the
mounting plates using a cable binder if clamps are not available.
If the contact point of the signal wires is far from the contact point of the screen, the screen should be left all the
way up to the connecting point of the cable. Then the outer sheathing need only be removed from the cable at
the contact point of the screen. The screen can then be fit as described above.
14.12.3 Unscreened Cables
Unscreened cables can be strain relieved mechanically with the screening plate. There are T-shaped metal
stays on the mounting plate to which cable binders can be connected.
A test connector can show up any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 236 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 257/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electronics. It
The measured load display in kg depends on the setting of the scales' characteristic data. A weight value of ap-
proximately 75 kg is shown if the parameter factory settings are used.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 258/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Fig. 24: Dimensions and position of the plugs VCU 20103 with mounting kit
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 238 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 259/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Weight 2.3 kg
DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues running
for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The clock buffer
is maintenance-free.
14.14.3 Power Supply
The VCU 20103 is powered by an a.c. voltage supply.
DANGER
Life-threatening voltages
The device must be installed in a housing that obstructs access to live compo-
nents if the electronics are powered by dangerously high voltages (U > 40 V) or
if there are dangerous voltages at the outputs. A tool must be required to open
this housing. Alternatively, the device can be installed in a room accessible only
to specialist personnel. If not installed in the housing, the live connections have
protection class IP20 only. Therefore, great care should be taken if the housing
is open. The supply voltage should be switched off before the housing is
opened.
AC Voltage Infeed
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 260/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Safety recommendation for the customer 16 A device fuses, type C as per EN 60898
Weighing channels:
VME0120 at connector strip X51.3 ⇒ Weighing channel LC1 with connection X91
VME0120 at connector strip X51.4 ⇒ Weighing channel LC2 with connection X92
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 240 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 261/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Maximum cable length to load cell 500 m (use a special cable from the recommended cable list)
2
Maximum wire cross-section at plug 1.5 mm
Connection 6-conductor system; in the case of load cells with 4 conductors, the termi-
nals Ref and U will require bridging in the interconnecting box.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 262/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The colors of the load cell cable conductor vary depending on the load cell m odel and manufacturer. The follow-
ing table can be used as a reference. More details can be found on the load cell data sheet.
The load cell cable screen should have a large surface area, e.g. it should be attached with a clam p to the VCU
fitting panel (see chapter 'Basic Information on EMC-Compatible Wiring'). The entire stretch of cable between
contact point of the screen to the VME0120 plug should be screened. The screen is removed just before the
plug.
Suitable terminal boxes are available for connecting together several load cells of one weighing point. The cable
should be laid separately from working cables. The wire pairs IN, REF and OUT are twisted in the cable and
must be screened pairwise. The cable itself will also require screening as a whole.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 242 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 263/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
14.14.6 Digital Connections
The VCU 20103 has inputs for external switching contacts and inputs for directly connecting proximity sensors.
The logical denotation of the inputs is determined by parameters using the software. LEDs behind the plug indi-
cate the state of the inputs.
Number of inputs 12
Input voltage 18 ... 36 VDC
X1:5 + DI1
X1:6 Signal
X1:3 + DI2
X1:4 Signal
X1:1 + DI3
X1:2 Signal
X2:5 + DI4
X2:6 Signal
X2:3 + DI5
X2:4 Signal
X2:1 + DI6
X2:2 Signal
X3:5 + DI7
X3:6 Signal
X3:3 + DI8
X3:4 Signal
X3:1 + DI9
X3:2 Signal
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 264/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
X4:6 + DI10
X4:7 Signal
X4:4 + DI11
X4:5 Signal
X4:1 + DI12
X4:2 Signal
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 244 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 265/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Take note of the technical data of the sensor when connecting it. The current limiting diode (CLD) must be di-
mensioned so that the voltage between Sig and Common is less than 2 V when the sensor is not switched on.
On the other hand, the current through the sensor should not exceed 50 mA. W hen switched on, the voltage
should be at least 18 V.
Number of inputs 2
Frequency range if used as impulse input for measuring 0.03 Hz ... 3 kHz
speed
X5:6 0V
X5:3 + DI14
X5:4 0V
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 266/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Fig. 30: Digital input: connecting a sensor or a contact at the sensor input
Fig. 31: Digital input: connecting an external signal voltage at the sensor input
The sensor for markers on the belt are connected to sockets CAL-1 and CAL-2 during adjustment.
Sensor A 2 4 1
Sensor B 5
Tab. 11 : Pin assignment for belt marker sensors
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 246 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 267/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The unit has 11 equal rela y outputs and one relay output with special functions. The logical denotation of the
outputs is determined by parameters using the software. LEDs beside plug X10 show the state of the outputs.
DANGER
Life-threatening voltages
The device must be installed in a housing that obstructs access to live compo-
nents if the electronics are powered by dangerously high voltages (U > 40 V) or
if there are dangerous voltages at the outputs. A tool must be required to open
this housing. Alternatively, the device can be installed in a room accessible only
to specialist personnel. If not installed in the housing, the live connections have
protection class IP20 only. Therefore, great care should be taken if the housing
is open. The supply voltage should be switched off before the housing is
opened.
Number of outputs 12
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 268/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
DO4 X11: 4 5 6
DO5 X13: 1 2 3
DO6 X13: 4 5 6
DO7 X14: 1 2 3
DO8 X14: 4 5 6
DO9 X15: 1 2 3
DO10 X15: 4 5 6
Isolation against control low voltage DO01 – DO11: 230 VAC double isolation (protective separation)
Note: DO12 is implemented twice and intended for the control of external electromechanical counters. Alterna-
tively, the electronic output [➙ 249] DO13 can be used to control an external counter. The power for DO12 must
be taken from the integrated power supply of the VCU 20103. The figure shows the proper connections for
X16: 5 and 6. X16: 3 and 4 have to be connected in a similar manner.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 248 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 269/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
An electronic output is available for signals that switch often. This connection is usually used if an electronic
counter or the counter input of a controller programmable from memory for the integration of the required quanti-
ty of bulk material is to be attached.
Number of outputs 1
Description DO13
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 270/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
14.14.7 Analog Connections
Assembly VCU 20103 is equipped with one analog output and two analog outputs. It can be backfitted with up to
four further output channels (inputs or outputs).
Number of inputs 1
Connections 0V X6: 5
0 … 20 mA X6: 3
Ri = 100 Ω
0 … 10 V X6: 4
Ri = 27 kΩ
Resolution 16 Bit
2
Maximum wire cross-section 2.5 mm
Galvanic isolation For 230 VAC, base isolation from all other voltages
Resolution 14 Bit
2
Maximum wire cross-section at plug 2.5 mm
X6:9 0V
A02 X6:6 +U
X6:7 0V
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 250 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 271/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
additional equipment is identified by attaching the stickers supplied to the cover at the corresponding intended
socket position.
The analog channel connections are always available at plug X12, but have no function if the optional cards are
not installed. The software must be informed that the optional cards have been
2 installed using the parameter
settings in block 1. Maximum cross-section of the connecting wire: 2.5 mm .
A10 0 V 1
Signal 2
A11 0 V 3
Signal 4
A12 0 V 5
Signal 6
A13 0 V 7
Signal 8
Tab. 14 : Connections
0(4) – 20 mA 0 – 10 V
Ri = 100 Ω Ri = 35 kΩ
Resolution 16 Bit
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 272/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Galvanic isolation For 230 VAC base isolation against control low voltage
Galvanic isolation For 230 VAC base isolation against control low voltage
Resolution 14 Bit
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 252 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 273/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The VHM has a touchscreen for displa ying and entering inputs. This allows work to be carried out in harsh and
dirty industrial environments. A lot of VHMs are only used for service jobs since the operation of a feeder often
does not require an operator panel because it is controlled by the plant's process control system. This is why
there is also a portable version available for mobile applications.
Contrast 600:1
Weight 1 kg
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 274/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
14.15.2 Power Supply
A) Working voltage for the VHM
The VHM can be supplied with DC voltage either by separate clamps (x4) or the ethernet interface (x3).
2
Maximum wire cross-section at plug: 1.5 mm
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 254 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 275/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
This 5 V supply can also be drawn from connection VHM:X2 (type A USB socket).
14.15.3 Data Interfaces
The device has the following interfaces:
▪
Ethernet
▪ Serial interfaces:
▪ USB (the software supports the connection of a bluetooth adapter only)
The data cable screens should be attached using the cable clam ps with a broad contact area to the plate.
14.15.3.1 Ethernet
We recommend that you connect device using the ethernet connection for distances of less than 100 m.
The connection is made at socket X3 with a standard patch cable.
NOTE: Pins 4+5 and 7+8 can power the device as well as supply it with data signals. A special coded cable is
required for a direct connection to the VCU. Refer to the chapter 'Power Supply' for details.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 276/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
2
Maximum wire cross-section at plug: 1.5 mm
2
Maximum wire cross-section at plug: 1.5 mm
14.15.4 Housing Models
This equipment is intended for being installed in the front of a control cubicle or in operating panel. This equip-
ment has a seal. They are pushed from the front into the opening and compactly pressed with the retention
frame from behind to the sheet of the cutout. The contact surface has to be plane. The screws of the retention
frame should be tightened with a torque of 3 Nm so that the entire front frame is lying on the sheet of the cutout.
This ensures protection class IP 65 from the start. Excessive torques can cause damage to the frame.
The back of the equipment has protection class IP 20. The housing has to ensure the protection against foreign
matter and water that may be needed in the application with the built-in units that the equipment is built into.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 256 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 277/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 278/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
+1.1 +1.1
Console panel section (width x height): 186 mm x 138 mm
Size of the device front surface (width x height): 202 x 154 mm
Power supply: 24 VDC (separate 24 V power supply unit or power supplied by the VCU)
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 258 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 279/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 280/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The power supply unit mounted on the rear increases the installation depth compared to the VHM 20100 by 70
mm. All other technical details and dimensions of the VHM 20101 are identical with those of the VHM 20100.
Integrated power supply:
Input 85 ... 264 VAC (nominal value: 110 ... 230 VAC)
Output: 24 VDC wired to the operating panel electronics
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 260 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 281/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Functions Model
Ethernet cable incl. power supply for connection to the VCU as pro- VSC 20100
tection class IP 20
Ethernet cable incl. power supply for connection to the VCU as pro-
tection class IP 65
Carrying strap
Holding frame for mounting locally the VHM 20110 at the scales
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 282/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The device can be powered for at least 3 hours if using new, fully-loaded batteries.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 262 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 283/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Carrying strap
The shortest display buildup time and change times are achieved with an Ethernet connection. The connection
can be permanent for normal operation or can be plugged as required for service access.
The connection is an RJ45 plug X3 on the operating panel. This plug can also supply power to the VHM via the
data cable (not Power over Ethernet).
The following example connections can be combined, though for each a data connection and the power supply
must be guaranteed.
Fig. 44: Example connection VHM with power supply via RJ 45
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 284/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
The cables between the VCU and VHM have to maintain the Cat5e specification. It can either be connected with
a prefabricated cable with a coded jack for the Ethernet X96 socket of the VCU or with cut goods and a cased
coded jack for field mounting.
Fig. 45: Example connection network with alternatives for the power supply
An RS-485 cable connection is selected if the distance between the operating panel and the VCU is greater than
100 m and there is no network available. No more than one operating panel can be operated at the same data
bus.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 264 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 285/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Fig. 46: Example connection for long distance between operating panel and VCU
Fig. 47: Example connection operating panel with power supply from VCU
The communication cable must be terminated physically at both ends by a activatable bus termination. An incor-
rect or no bus termination can lead to interruptions in the data transfer.
First and last device at the bus Position 1-2 Position 1-2
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 286/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
Use the operating panel VHM 201xx with built-in bluetooth adapter to establish a bluetooth connection. Plug the
VCU bluetooth adapter into the USB socket. In demanding circumstances the bluetooth adapter can be connect-
ed by cable and installed in a separate housing at a location more favorable for transmission. The cable length
may not exceed 10 m.
Bluetooth constructs a separate wireless TCP/IP network in a separate IP address range. The connection is
established in stages. The connection is selected by choosing the bluetooth communication partner. The subor-
dinate communication layers are then connected automatically.
The range of the bluetooth transmission depends heavily on the physical ambient conditions. Ranges of around
30 m are typical if the partners are within sight of each other (with no glass barrier between them).
EasyServe can also communicate with a VCU via WLAN. This requires installing an external wireless WLAN
access point.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 266 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 287/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 288/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
V079339.B02 2
V079339.B03 5
VSC28003 V120823.B01 3
VSC28005 V120825.B01 4
V130402.B01 30 Red
V130402.B01 30 Yellow
V130402.B01 30 Grey
M12 plug
Prefabricated assemblies are available for making it easier to connect VCU and VHM via RS485.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 268 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 289/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 290/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
1 Configure the WLAN access point with the service program supplied with the equipment. Encoding should be
activated. The local regulations for WLAN networks should be complied with. The IP address of the adapter has to
be in the IP subnet of the VCU.
2 Mechanically install the WLAN access point and connect the power supply
3 Establish an Ethernet connection between the WLAN access point and network with standard cables.
4 The WLAN adapter installed in the opposite mobile point provides a wireless network. The IP address should be
set for this network. It has to be in the same IP subnet as that of the VCUs and it has to be unambiguous in the
subnet.
5 The connection to the WLAN access point should be established in the mobile equipment.
6 The VCU of EasyServe or a browser is now accessed with the well-known methods.
Tab. 16 : WLAN access configuration
Type ALL0258
Protection class IP 54
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 270 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 291/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 292/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
3 Screen clamp
There are several slits beneath each cable lead-through. The cable clamps will press the cable screen against
the shielding plate if they are inserted into these slits. This will correctly earth the screening. M-shaped slits can
also be used as pull relief for cable binders.
The correct plug type for each input (and output) can be found in the technical specifications of the individual
units, e.g. Phoenix MSTB, grid size 3.5 mm. Each type has a maximum cable diameter that can be used. The
2
maximum wire cross section for Phoenix MSTB plug-in connectors with a grid size of 5 mm is 2.5 mm , for
2
MSTB connectors with a grid size of 3.5 mm maximum 1.5 mm .
Correct cabling is indispensable for optimal electromagnetic interference protection. Please follow the corre-
sponding recommendations.
14.19.2 Screened Cables
The screen of screened cables in generally connected at both ends to GND with a broad-contact connection.
The DISOCONT Tersus is supplied with mounting plates that have an appropriate contact surface in the area
around the cable feed. The outer sheathing is removed from the cables and the cables are then clamped with
the special screen clamps against the contact surface. The screen shielding braid can also be attached to the
mounting plates using a cable binder if clamps are not available.
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 272 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 293/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
If the contact point of the signal wires is far from the contact point of the screen, the screen should be left all the
way up to the connecting point of the cable. Then the outer sheathing need only be removed from the cable at
the contact point of the screen. The screen can then be fit as described above.
14.19.3 Unscreened Cables
Unscreened cables can be strain relieved mechanically with the screening plate. There are T-shaped metal
stays on the mounting plate to which cable binders can be connected.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 294/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Appendix
EG-Konform itatserklarung
Decl arat i on of con f ormi t y
schenck proct'ss -s-
Hie11nIer kliir ldas Unlernehmen I The Company
i I E C - Di re
EG - Richtline ct iv
e
'
20061951EG/EC (Nieder spannung I Low l ol tag e)
200411081EGIEC {Eiektr omagn elische Ver lf aglichkeI E l ect ro
magneti c c om patibi li ty)
94/9/EC (ATEX; nur Var iante x-30 i valiant x -30 only )
EX ?LOSIVE ;m.tOSP HE
N.ES PM70 .E Oli iPMfNT ·<iE!I.'ERAt REC:WR£\tE HTS
GXPLOG:IONSF"AE!t G£ A. i/CSPHAERE TEt! 3t; CERA!:ll: S.l NJ9£)if'.-0S! SSC>f'JfZ I)Uf:.CHCEH;\ELISE"l•
EN 60079-31 2009 EX PLOSIVE ANOSPHEF<fS P/.RT JL EQVIP • . Em WS7( GJ/J1f O.IJ PR OT ECTKJ N 9Y E N CLOSIII?F /"'
V
(ppa. Groll)
(leiter Ent\hi(:klung/ Head nevelopmenU
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 274 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 295/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
Index
.PAR Files ................................................................................................................................................................................ 50
2-Sensor Slip.......................................................................................................................................................................... 151
2-Sensor Slip active ............................................................................................................................................................... 151
2-sensor slip monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................... 216
About This Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Access Rights Limitation FB................................................................................................................................................... 161
Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters........................................................................................................................ 49
Adaptation 1........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Adaptation 2........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Address .......................................................................................................................................................................... 159, 160
Afterflow Measurement Time ................................................................................................................................................... 97
AI Moisture Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 123
Analog calibr ation................................................................................................................................................................... 147
Analog Channel A10 ................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Analog Channel A11 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Channel A12 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Channel A13 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Connections ............................................................................................................................................................... 248
Analog I/O Points ..................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Analog Input 1 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 1 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 2 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 2 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 3 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 3 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 4 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Analog Input 4 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Input 5 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Analog Input 5 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Input VAI 20100 ......................................................................................................................................................... 249
Analog Output 1 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 1 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 1 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 2 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 2 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 2 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 3 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 3 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 3 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 4 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 4 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 4 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 5 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 5 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 5 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 151
Analog Output 6 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 150
Analog Output 6 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 150
Analog Output 6 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 151
Analog Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Analog Outputs VAO 20100 / 20103 ...................................................................................................................................... 250
Analog Trim Function ............................................................................................................................................................... 25
Angle ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 95
AO Actual Flow Rate............................................................................................................................................................. 127
AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 130
AO Belt Load......................................................................................................................................................................... 128
AO Density ............................................................................................................................................................................ 130
AO Deviation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
AO Flow Rate corrected ........................................................................................................................................................ 124
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 296/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 276 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 297/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
Connection
Control Offset viaspeed
WLANcontroller
..............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... 1 34
20
Control Sources ....................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Controller ................................................................................................................................................................................ 183
Controller Magnitude Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 119
Counter 1 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 83
Counter 2 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Counter 3 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Daily Total Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................. 6
Data Format ........................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Data Inter f aces....................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Data Log Value 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Data Log Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 156
Data Log Value 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 3 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 4 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 5 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 6 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 7 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 8 ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Data Log Value 9 ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Data Log Values....................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Data Logging.......................................................................................................................................................................... 154
DC_Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Default Analog I/O .................................................................................................................................................................. 199
Default Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 197
Default Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 198
Default I/O Points ................................................................................................................................................................... 197
Definitions .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Density Off set......................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Density Range........................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Density Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Deviation Off set...................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Deviation Range..................................................................................................................................................................... 129
DI Acknowledge Events ........................................................................................................................................................ 131
DI Belt Motion Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................... 105
DI BIC f reeze......................................................................................................................................................................... 107
DI Chain Motion Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................ 126
DI Coal Flow Monitor ............................................................................................................................................................. 136
DI Coal on belt switch............................................................................................................................................................ 134
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 298/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
DI Volumetric
Digital Mode...............................................................................................................................................................
Connections ................................................................................................................................................................ 1
240
41
Digital inputs........................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Digital Inputs 24 VDC for General Use ................................................................................................................................... 241
Digital Inputs as per EN 60947-5-6 for Connecting Sensors.................................................................................................. 243
Digital Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................ 245
Digital Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................ 140
Dimensions and Position of the Plugs .................................................................................................................................... 236
Discharge Pluggage Delay..................................................................................................................................................... 133
Display Formats ....................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Display Functions..................................................................................................................................................................... 38
DO Actual Flow Rate M AX .................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO ALARM ........................................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO ALARM (2nd) .................................................................................................................................................................. 142
DO Belt Drift .......................................................................................................................................................................... 109
DO Belt Skew........................................................................................................................................................................ 109
DO Belt Slip........................................................................................................................................................................... 108
DO CleanOut Timer .............................................................................................................................................................. 125
DO Deviation......................................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO Dual Tacho active ........................................................................................................................................................... 105
DO Feeder Run Forward....................................................................................................................................................... 141
DO Feeder Run Forward (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................. 141
DO Feeder Run Reverse....................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................. 142
DO Feeder running (2nd) ...................................................................................................................................................... 141
DO Feeder Star ted................................................................................................................................................................ 141
DO Feeding........................................................................................................................................................................... 146
DO Feeding (2nd) ................................................................................................................................................................. 146
DO FRI Frequency .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
DO Load M AX ....................................................................................................................................................................... 144
DO Load MIN ........................................................................................................................................................................ 143
DO Local Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO Moisture active................................................................................................................................................................ 124
DO Moisture MAX ................................................................................................................................................................. 124
DO PLC 1.............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 2.............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 3.............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 4.............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO PLC 5.............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 278 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 299/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 300/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 280 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 301/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 302/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 282 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 303/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
Limit
Limit Load
SpeedMIN MAX ......................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
112
14
Limit Speed MIN.................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Limit Values............................................................................................................................................................................ 111
LO01 Event LC Input < MIN ................................................................................................................................................. 191
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN....................................................................................................................................... 192
LO03 Event Load MIN.......................................................................................................................................................... 192
LO04 Event Speed MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
Load Cell Input VME0120 ...................................................................................................................................................... 238
Load cross section ................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Loading Custom Default Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Loading Factory Default Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 51
Logger cycle time ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Loss of Flow Trip Delay.......................................................................................................................................................... 134
Lower Limit............................................................................................................................................................................. 119
MAC Addresses ..................................................................................................................................................................... 229
Maintenance Electric .............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Maintenance Feeder Run....................................................................................................................................................... 153
Maintenance interval .............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Maintenance Speed ................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Material Flow.......................................................................................................................................................................... 185
Material Test ............................................................................................................................................................................ 56
MAX ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Maximum Feedrate .................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Measuring Principle.................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE) .................................................................................................................................... 208
Mechanic................................................................................................................................................................................ 188
MF05 Event Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 185
MF13 Event Temperature-MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 186
MF14 Event Remote TCI too small ...................................................................................................................................... 186
MIN......................................................................................................................................................................................... 191
Minimum Feedrate ................................................................................................................................................................... 90
Minimum System Requirements .............................................................................................................................................. 47
Modbus-Version ..................................................................................................................................................................... 158
Mode Select Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................... 92
Moist correction (MOIST) ....................................................................................................................................................... 221
Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................................. 122
Moisture Active....................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Moisture MAX......................................................................................................................................................................... 124
Moisture Offset....................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Moisture Range...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 304/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
Operation
Operation Using
Using the EasyServe .....................................................................................................................................................
196NT Display ......................................................................................................................................... 4
47
5
Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI................................................................................................................................... 37
Optional Analog Channels...................................................................................................................................................... 248
Options..................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Own Address.......................................................................................................................................................................... 156
P01 - Hardware Modules.......................................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.01 - Event Communication HMI 1 .................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.02 - Event Communication ARM7.................................................................................................................................... 79
P01.03 - Analog Channel A10.................................................................................................................................................. 79
P01.04 - Analog Channel A11.................................................................................................................................................. 80
P01.05 - Analog Channel A12.................................................................................................................................................. 80
P01.06 - Analog Channel A13.................................................................................................................................................. 80
P02 - Feeder Definition ............................................................................................................................................................ 80
P02.01 - Language................................................................................................................................................................... 80
P02.02 - Units .......................................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.03 - Scale Name ............................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.04 - Password................................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.05 - Nominal Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.06 - Nominal Speed .......................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.07 - Display Formats......................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.08 - Flow Rate Units ......................................................................................................................................................... 83
P02.09 - Counter 1 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 83
P02.10 - Counter 2 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 84
P02.11 - Counter 3 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 84
P02.12 - DO Pulse Counter ..................................................................................................................................................... 84
P02.13 - Totalizer Increment .................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.14 - Pulse Length Total..................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.15 - Event Remote TCI too small..................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.16 - Maintenance Speed................................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.17 - DO FRI Frequency.................................................................................................................................................... 87
P02.18 - Remote FRI Frequency ............................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.20 - Codepage .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.21 - DC_Mode................................................................................................................................................................... 87
P03 - Control Sources .............................................................................................................................................................. 88
P03.01 - Feeder Star t............................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.02 - Feedrate Setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.03 - Setpoint Range .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.04 - Setpoint Off set ........................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.05 - Maximum Feedr ate.................................................................................................................................................... 89
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 284 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 305/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
P04.10 - Loadcontrol
P05 - Feeder cross section.....................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................ 9
976
P05.01 - Volum on LC failure ................................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.02 - Event Volum. caused by LC-error ............................................................................................................................. 97
P05.03 - Afterflow Measurement Time..................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active................................................................................................................................................. 98
P05.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06 - Feeder Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.01 - Event Stand-By......................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ................................................................................................................................................. 99
P06.03 - Event Tachometer Input ........................................................................................................................................... 99
P06.04 - Event Error LC Input ................................................................................................................................................. 99
P06.05 - Event LC Input < MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 100
P06.06 - Event LC Input > MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 100
P06.07 - Event Setpoint Limited............................................................................................................................................ 101
P06.08 - Event Power Failure ............................................................................................................................................... 101
P06.09 - Time Deviation......................................................................................................................................................... 102
P06.10 - Threshold Deviation................................................................................................................................................. 102
P06.11 - Factor Deviation....................................................................................................................................................... 102
P06.12 - Event Deviation....................................................................................................................................................... 103
P06.13 - Event Controller Limited ......................................................................................................................................... 103
P06.14 - Event Memory......................................................................................................................................................... 104
P06.15 - Event Analog Input < Off set.................................................................................................................................... 104
P06.16 - DO Dual Tacho active............................................................................................................................................. 105
P06.17 - Event Primary Tacho Failure .................................................................................................................................. 105
P07 - Belt Monitoring.............................................................................................................................................................. 105
P07.01 - DI Belt Motion Monitor ............................................................................................................................................ 105
P07.02 - Belt Motion Monitor Delay........................................................................................................................................ 106
P07.03 - Event Belt Motion Monitor ....................................................................................................................................... 106
P07.04 - DI Source Belt Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 106
P07.05 - BIC Active................................................................................................................................................................ 107
P07.06 - DI BIC freeze .......................................................................................................................................................... 107
P07.07 - Slip Value ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
P07.08 - Event Slip ............................................................................................................................................................... 107
P07.09 - DO Belt Slip ............................................................................................................................................................ 108
P07.10 - Sensor Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.11 - Sensor Width ........................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.12 - Sensor Off set........................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.13 - Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.14 - Event Belt Drift........................................................................................................................................................ 109
P07.15 - Belt Skew................................................................................................................................................................. 109
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 306/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
P09.09
P09.10 -- Limit
Event Speed
SpeedMIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 1
MIN.................................................................................................................................................... 113
13
P09.11 - Limit Speed M AX .................................................................................................................................................... 114
P09.12 - Event Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 114
P09.13 - Temperature MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 114
P09.14 - Event Temperature-MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 114
P10 - Calibration Data............................................................................................................................................................ 115
P10.01 - Calibration Probe Span............................................................................................................................................ 115
P10.02 - Pulses per length ..................................................................................................................................................... 115
P10.03 - Range Correction TW .............................................................................................................................................. 115
P10.04 - Range Correction TC............................................................................................................................................... 116
P10.05 - Range Correction TM .............................................................................................................................................. 116
P10.06 - Belt Circuit Time ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
P10.07 - Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) ................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.08 - Calibration Weight ................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.09 - Test Chain Weight ................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.10 - Basic Tare ............................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.11 - Belt Circuit No.......................................................................................................................................................... 117
P11 - Rate controller .............................................................................................................................................................. 118
P11.01 - P-Component KP..................................................................................................................................................... 118
P11.02 - I-Component TN ...................................................................................................................................................... 118
P11.03 - AO Motor Speed Control ........................................................................................................................................ 118
P11.04 - Lower Limit .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
P11.05 - Upper Limit .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
P11.06 - Controller Magnitude Off set ..................................................................................................................................... 119
P11.07 - Position at STOP ..................................................................................................................................................... 119
P11.08 - KP speed controller ................................................................................................................................................. 120
P11.09 - VAP Active............................................................................................................................................................... 120
P11.10 - Platform Dis.Length ................................................................................................................................................. 120
P11.11 - CC_FC speed controller .......................................................................................................................................... 120
P11.12 - Control Offset speed controller ................................................................................................................................ 120
P11.13 - Bypass..................................................................................................................................................................... 121
P11.14 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord.............................................................................................................................................. 121
P11.15 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord............................................................................................................................................. 121
P11.16 - Adaptation 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P11.17 - Adaptation 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12 - Moisture........................................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.01 - Moisture Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.02 - Moisture Select ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.03 - AI Moisture Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 123
P12.04 - Nominal Moisture..................................................................................................................................................... 123
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 286 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 307/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
P14.03
P14.04 -- Setpoint
AO ActualRange
Flow........................................................................................................................................................
Rate .............................................................................................................................................. 1 127
27
P14.05 - Flow Rate Off set ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.06 - Flow Rate Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.07 - AO Belt Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.08 - Belt Load Off set ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.09 - Belt Load Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.10 - AO Speed ............................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.11 - Speed Off set............................................................................................................................................................ 129
P14.12 - Speed Range........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.13 - AO Deviation........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.14 - Deviation Off set ....................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.15 - Deviation Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.16 - AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd) ..................................................................................................................................... 130
P14.17 - AO Density ............................................................................................................................................................. 130
P14.18 - Density Offset .......................................................................................................................................................... 130
P14.19 - Density Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 130
P15 - Digital Inputs................................................................................................................................................................. 131
P15.01 - DI Acknowledge Events .......................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.02 - DI Local Mode......................................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.03 - Event External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.04 - DI External Event 1................................................................................................................................................. 132
P15.05 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 ............................................................................................................................. 132
P15.06 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 ............................................................................................................................. 132
P15.07 - DI Reset Totalizer 1................................................................................................................................................ 132
P15.08 - DI Reset Totalizer 2................................................................................................................................................ 132
P15.09 - DI Discharge Pluggage........................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.10 - Discharge Pluggage Delay ...................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.11 - Event Discharge Pluggage ..................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.12 - DI Coal on belt switch............................................................................................................................................. 134
P15.13 - Loss of Flow Trip Delay ........................................................................................................................................... 134
P15.14 - Event Loss of Material ............................................................................................................................................ 134
P15.15 - Event Coal on Belt .................................................................................................................................................. 135
P15.16 - Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive ........................................................................................................................... 135
P15.17 - DI Motor feedback .................................................................................................................................................. 135
P15.18 - Event Motor Star t.................................................................................................................................................... 136
P15.19 - DI Coal Flow Monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 136
P15.20 - Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay .............................................................................................................................. 136
P15.21 - Event Coal Flow...................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.23 - DI Remote CTRL .................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.24 - DI OFF/Maint CTRL................................................................................................................................................ 137
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 308/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
P16.09
P16.10 -- DO
DO ALARM.............................................................................................................................................................
ALARM (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 1 142
42
P16.11 - DO Deviation .......................................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.12 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN....................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.13 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ..................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.14 - DO Load MIN.......................................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.15 - DO Load M AX............................... .......................................................................................................................... 144
P16.16 - DO Speed MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.17 - DO Speed MAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.18 - DO Volumetric Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 144
P16.19 - DO Volumetric Mode (2nd) ..................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.20 - DO Local Mode....................................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.21 - DO WARNING........................................................................................................................................................ 145
P16.22 - DO WARNING (2nd)............................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.23 - DO Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................ 146
P16.24 - DO Feeding (2nd) ................................................................................................................................................... 146
P16.25 - DO Remote CTRL .................................................................................................................................................. 146
P16.26 - DO Remote CTRL (2nd) ......................................................................................................................................... 146
P17 - Analog calibration ......................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.01 - Analog Input 1 Min................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.02 - Analog Input 1 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 147
P17.03 - Analog Input 2 Min................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.04 - Analog Input 2 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 147
P17.05 - Analog Input 3 Min................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.06 - Analog Input 3 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 147
P17.07 - Analog Input 4 Min................................................................................................................................................... 148
P17.08 - Analog Input 4 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 148
P17.09 - Analog Input 5 Min................................................................................................................................................... 148
P17.10 - Analog Input 5 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 148
P17.11 - Analog Output 1 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 148
P17.12 - Analog Output 1 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 148
P17.13 - Analog Output 2 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 148
P17.14 - Analog Output 2 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.15 - Analog Output 3 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 149
P17.16 - Analog Output 3 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.17 - Analog Output 4 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 149
P17.18 - Analog Output 4 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.19 - Analog Output 5 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 149
P17.20 - Analog Output 5 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.21 - Analog Output 6 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 150
P17.22 - Analog Output 6 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 150
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 288 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 309/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
P19.04 - Event
P20 - Data Maint.Feeder
Logging Run......................................................................................................................................... 1
................................................................................................................................................................ 154
53
P20.01 - Hourly Total Time .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.02 - Daily Total Time....................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.03 - Logger cycle time..................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.04 - Data Log Value 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.05 - Data Log Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.06 - Data Log Value 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.07 - Data Log Value 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.08 - Data Log Value 5 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.09 - Data Log Value 6 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.10 - Data Log Value 7 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.11 - Data Log Value 8 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
P20.12 - Data Log Value 9 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
P20.13 - Data Log Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 156
P21 - Communication EasyServe .......................................................................................................................................... 156
P21.01 - Own Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
P21.02 - Baud Rate................................................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.03 - Format Data............................................................................................................................................................. 156
P22 - Communication Fieldbus .............................................................................................................................................. 157
P22.01 - Protocol Type........................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.02 - Timeout Host ........................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .................................................................................................................................. 157
P22.04 - Modbus-Version....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.05 - Word Sequence....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.06 - Byte Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................ 158
P22.07 - Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.08 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 159
P22.09 - Resolution................................................................................................................................................................ 159
P22.10 - Baud r ate ................................................................................................................................................................. 159
P22.11 - Data Format............................................................................................................................................................. 160
P22.12 - Physics .................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.13 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.14 - FLOAT-Format......................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.15 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.16 - Baud r ate ................................................................................................................................................................. 160
P22.17 - Parameter................................................................................................................................................................ 161
P22.18 - Preset Count............................................................................................................................................................ 161
P22.19 - READ_ID Count....................................................................................................................................................... 161
P22.20 - Access Rights Limitation FB .................................................................................................................................... 161
P22.21 - Remote IP Address FB ............................................................................................................................................ 162
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 310/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
P25.03
P25.04 -- ID
ID Preset
Preset Value
Value 3.....................................................................................................................................................
4..................................................................................................................................................... 1
165
65
P25.05 - ID Preset Value 5..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.06 - ID Preset Value 6..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.07 - ID Preset Value 7..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.08 - ID Preset Value 8..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.09 - ID Read Value 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.10 - ID Read Value 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.11 - ID Read Value 3 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.12 - ID Read Value 4 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.13 - ID Read Value 5 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.14 - ID Read Value 6 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.15 - ID Read Value 7 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.16 - ID Read Value 8 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.17 - ID Read Value 9 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.18 - ID Read Value 10 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.19 - ID Read Value 11 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.20 - ID Read Value 12 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.21 - ID Read Value 13 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.22 - ID Read Value 14 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.23 - ID Read Value 15 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.24 - ID Read Value 16 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P26 - FCB analog outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.01 - FCB_AO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1..................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.05 - FCB_AO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.08 - Reference FCB_AO 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 170
P26.09 - FCB_AO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................. 170
P26.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 .................................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.12 - Reference FCB_AO 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 171
P26.13 - FCB_AO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................. 171
P26.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 .................................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.16 - Reference FCB_AO 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 172
P26.17 - FCB_AO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................. 172
P26.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5..................................................................................................................................................... 172
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 290 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 311/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
P27.16
P27.17 -- FCB_DO
FCB_DO 16 17 .............................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................. 1
176
77
P27.18 - FCB_DO 18 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.19 - FCB_DO 19 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.20 - FCB_DO 20 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P28 - Configuration HMI Values............................................................................................................................................. 178
P28.01 - HMI Value 01 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.02 - HMI Value 02 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.03 - HMI Value 03 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.04 - HMI Value 04 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.05 - HMI Value 05 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.06 - HMI Value 06 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.07 - HMI Value 07 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.08 - HMI Value 08 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
P28.09 - HMI Value 09 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
P28.10 - HMI Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
Parameter .............................................................................................................................................................................. 161
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules................................................................................................................................. 78
Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition ................................................................................................................................... 80
Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources ..................................................................................................................................... 88
Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................ 94
Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ....................................................................................................................................... 97
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring.................................................................................................................................. 98
Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring..................................................................................................................................... 105
Parameter Block 08 - Filters................................................................................................................................................... 110
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ......................................................................................................................................... 111
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ................................................................................................................................... 115
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ..................................................................................................................................... 118
Parameter Block 12 - Moisture............................................................................................................................................... 122
Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control .................................................................................................................................. 125
Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs.................................................................................................................................... 127
Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs........................................................................................................................................ 131
Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 140
Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration ................................................................................................................................ 147
Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip ....................................................................................................................................... 151
Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................ 153
Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging ....................................................................................................................................... 154
Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................................................................. 156
Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus ..................................................................................................................... 157
Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................... 162
Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 163
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 312/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration .................................................................................................................... 165
Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ............................................................................................................................. 169
Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs .............................................................................................................................. 174
Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values.................................................................................................................... 177
Parameter Details .................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Parameter Log Values.............................................................................................................................................................. 40
Parameter Overview ................................................................................................................................................................ 62
Parameter Set .......................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Parameter Setup ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Parameters............................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Password ................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
P-Component KP ................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Performing Calibr ations............................................................................................................................................................ 18
Physics................................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Platform Dis.Length................................................................................................................................................................ 120
PLC Functionality (Optional) .................................................................................................................................................. 222
PLC Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Portable Devices .................................................................................................................................................................... 258
Position at STOP.................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................................. 237, 252
Prefabricated system cables .................................................................................................................................................. 264
Preset Count .......................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Print
ProbeParameters ......................................................................................................................................................................
Error ......................................................................................................................................................................... 20, 51
22
Program EasyServe VPC 20150.............................................................................................................................................. 47
Protocol Type ......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Pulse Counter corrected......................................................................................................................................................... 125
Pulse Length Total ................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Pulses per length ................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Raise/Lower Response Time ................................................................................................................................................... 91
Range Correction TC ............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Range Correction TM............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Range Correction TW............................................................................................................................................................. 115
Range FCB_AO 1 .................................................................................................................................................................. 169
Range FCB_AO 2 .................................................................................................................................................................. 170
Range FCB_AO 3 .................................................................................................................................................................. 171
Range FCB_AO 4 .................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Range FCB_AO 5 .................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Rate controller ........................................................................................................................................................................ 118
Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Read/change Parameters ........................................................................................................................................................ 50
READ_ID Count ..................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Reference FCB_AO 1............................................................................................................................................................. 169
Reference FCB_AO 2............................................................................................................................................................. 170
Reference FCB_AO 3............................................................................................................................................................. 171
Reference FCB_AO 4............................................................................................................................................................. 172
Reference FCB_AO 5............................................................................................................................................................. 173
Relay Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................................ 245
Remote FRI Frequency............................................................................................................................................................ 87
Remote IP Address FB........................................................................................................................................................... 162
Resolution .............................................................................................................................................................................. 159
Restoring the Factory Default Settings..................................................................................................................................... 42
Retro-reflective Tape Clips................................................................................................................................................. 20, 22
RS-485 Hardware .................................................................................................................................................................. 231
Run Mode Select...................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Safety notes ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................... 192
SC02 Event Stand-By .......................................................................................................................................................... 193
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................ 193
SC04 Event Maint. Electr ic................................................................................................................................................... 193
SC05 Event External Event 1............................................................................................................................................... 194
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 292 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 313/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Index
SC06 Event External Event 2............................................................................................................................................... 194
SC11 Event External Event 3............................................................................................................................................... 194
SC12 Event External Event 4............................................................................................................................................... 194
Scale Name.............................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Scale Operation Screens ......................................................................................................................................................... 52
Screened Cables............................................................................................................................................................ 234, 270
Sensor Length........................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Sensor Offset ......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Sensor Width.......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................. 192
Serial Interfaces: .................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Serial Networks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Service Values ......................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ............................................................................................................................................................ 121
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ........................................................................................................................................................... 121
Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................................. 89, 127
Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................................ 89, 127
Setting the Current Time and Date........................................................................................................................................... 43
Setting the IP Address in DISOCONT Tersus Systems ......................................................................................................... 230
Setting Time ............................................................................................................................................................................. 54
Setup Notes ............................................................................................................................................................................. 13
Setup Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Signal Words..............................................................................................................................................................................
Signal Words for Application Notes ............................................................................................................................................ 4 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Simulation Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.).................................................................................................................................................. 117
Slip Value ............................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Slip Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 152
Source Load Cell...................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Source Load Cell 2................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Source Run Enable .................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Source Sensor 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Span (CAL 2) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Speed Measurement ................................................................................................................................................................ 95
Speed Offset .......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Speed Range ......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Speed Setpoint......................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Stand-By Limit Value................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Start Program and Connect to Feeder ..................................................................................................................................... 47
Startup and Functional Check .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Subnetwork Mask................................................................................................................................................................... 230
Switch-on logic ....................................................................................................................................................................... 206
SY01 Event Memory ............................................................................................................................................................ 195
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial .............................................................................................................................. 195
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication...................................................................................................................................... 195
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication .................................................................................................................................... 196
SY12 Event Communication ARM7 ..................................................................................................................................... 196
System Message.................................................................................................................................................................... 195
TA: Tare ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Tab.1: Parameter for BIC and for belt motion monitoring......................................................................................................... 27
Tab.10: DISOCONT Load Cell Connection, Wire Colors ....................................................................................................... 240
Tab.11: Pin assignment for belt marker sensors .................................................................................................................... 244
Tab.12: Technical data for the inductive transmitter input...................................................................................................... 245
Tab.13: Technical data of the analog input ............................................................................................................................ 248
Tab.14: Connections .............................................................................................................................................................. 249
Tab.15: Details of the system cables ..................................................................................................................................... 266
Tab.16: WLAN access configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 268
Tab.2: Sequence for adjustment and commissioning............................................................................................................... 27
Tab.3: Setting and adjusting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring ..................................................................................... 29
Tab.4: Operating access .......................................................................................................................................................... 31
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 314/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
BV-H6411GB, 1221 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Grou
- 294 - November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 315/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Stock Redler India Private Limited
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 316/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
3.0 Certified Drawings
Stock Redler India Private Limited
Section Index
November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 317/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 318/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 319/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 320/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 321/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 322/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 323/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 324/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 325/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 326/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
4.0 Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists
Stock Redler India Private Limited
November 201
1272-0000 Revision 0
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 327/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 328/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 329/458
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 330/458
Sectio n Index
1 Connection Diagram ‐RPC S11153
2 Cabinet Assembly Drawing‐RPC S11154
3 Panel Assembly Drawing ‐RPC S11157
4 Connection Diagram –FIC S11159
5 Cabinet Assembly Drawing‐FIC S11160
6 Panel Assembly Drawing ‐FIC S11162
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 331/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 332/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 333/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 334/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 335/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 336/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 337/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 338/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 339/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 340/458
Section Index
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 341/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 342/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 343/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Integral Horsepower
AC Induction Motors
ODP, WPI, WPII Enclosure
TEFC Enclosure
Explosion Proof
2/07 MN400
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 344/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 345/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 2
Installation & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 1
General Information
Section 1
General Information
Overview This manual contains general procedures that apply to Baldor Motor products. Be sure to read and
understand the Safety Notice statements in this manual. For your protection, do not install, operate o
attempt to perform maintenance procedures until you understand the Warning and Caution statement
Warning statement indicates a possible unsafe condition that can cause harm to personnel. A Cautio
statement indicates a condition that can cause damage to equipment.
Important: This instruction manual is not intended to include a comprehensive listing of all details for all
procedures required for installation, operation and maintenance. This manual describes gene
guidelines that apply to most of the motor products shipped by Baldor. If you have a question
about a procedure or are uncertain about any detail, Do Not Proceed. Please contact your Bal
distributor for more information or clarification.
Before you install, operate or perform maintenance, become familiar with the following:
NEMA Publication MG-2, Safety Standard for Construction and guide
for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.
The National Electrical Code
Local codes and Practices
Limited Warranty
1. Most Baldor products are warranted for 18 months from the date of shipment to Baldor’s customer from Baldo
district warehouse or, if applicable, from Baldor’s factory. Baldor Standard−E® standard efficient motors are
warranted for 24 months. Standard−E is limited to three phase, general purpose, 1−200 HP ratings that fall un
the Energy Policy Act (EPAct). Baldor Super−E® premium efficient motors are warranted for 36 months. Baldo
IEEE841 motors are warranted for 60 months. All warranty claims must be submitted to a Baldor Service Cen
prior to the expiration of the warranty period.
2. Baldor will, at its option repair or replace a motor which fails due to defects in material or workmanship during
warranty period if:
a. the purchaser presents the defective motor at or ships it prepaid to, the Baldor plant in Fort Smith, Arkans
or one of the Baldor Authorized Service Centers and
b. the purchaser gives written notification concerning the motor and the claimed defect including the date
purchased, the task performed by the Baldor motor and the problem encountered.
3. Baldor will not pay the cost of removal of any electric motor from any equipment, the cost of delivery to Fort S
Arkansas or a Baldor Authorized Service Center, or the cost of any incidental or consequential damages resu
from the claimed defects. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.) Any implied warranty given by laws shall be limited to
the duration of the warranty period hereunder. (Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.)
4. Baldor Authorized Service Centers, when convinced to their satisfaction that a Baldor motor developed defect
material or workmanship within the warranty period, are authorized to proceed with the required repairs to fulf
Baldor’s warranty when the cost of such repairs to be paid by Baldor does not exceed Baldor ’s warranty repa
allowance. Baldor will not pay overtime premium repair charges without prior written authorization.
5. The cost of warranty repairs made by centers other than Baldor Authorized Service Centers WILL NOT be pa
unless first authorized in writing by Baldor.
6. Claims by a purchaser that a motor is defective even when a failure results within one hour after being placed
service are not always justified. Therefore, Baldor Authorized Service Centers must determine from the cond
of the motor as delivered to the center whether or not the motor is defective. If in the opinion of a Baldor
Authorized Service Center, a motor did not fail as a result of defects in material or workmanship, the center is
proceed with repairs only if the purchaser agrees to pay for such repairs. If the decision is in dispute, the
purchaser should still pay for the repairs and submit the paid invoice and the Authorized Service Center’s sign
service report to Baldor for further consideration.
7. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to stat
Safety Notice: This equipment contains high voltage! Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
Only qualified personnel should attempt installation, operation and maintenance of
electrical equipment.
Be sure that you are completely familiar with NEMA publication MG-2, safety standards
for construction and guide for selection, installation and use of electric motors and
generators, the National Electrical Code and local codes and practices. Unsafe
installation or use can cause conditions that lead to serious or fatal injury. Only qualified
personnel should attempt the installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not touch electrical connections before you first ensure that
power has been disconnected. Electrical shock can cause serious
or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the
installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment.
WARNING: Be sure the system is properly grounded before applying power.
Do not apply AC power before you ensure that all grounding
instructions have been followed. Electrical shock can cause
serious or fatal injury. National Electrical Code and Local codes
must be carefully followed.
WARNING: Avoid extended exposure to machinery with high noise levels. Be
sure to wear ear protective devices to reduce harmful effects to
your hearing.
WARNING: This equipment may be connected to other machinery that has
rotating parts or parts that are driven by this equipment. Improper
use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel
should attempt to install operate or maintain this equipment.
WARNING: Do not by-pass or disable protective devices or safety guards.
Safety features are designed to prevent damage to personnel or
equipment. These devices can only provide protection if they
remain operative.
WARNING: Avoid the use of automatic reset devices if the automatic restarting
of equipment can be hazardous to personnel or equipment.
WARNING: Be sure the load is properly coupled to the motor shaft before
applying power. The shaft key must be fully captive by the load
device. Improper coupling can cause harm to personnel or
equipment if the load decouples from the shaft during operation.
WARNING: Use proper care and procedures that are safe during handling,
lifting, installing, operating and maintaining operations.
Improper methods may cause muscle strain or other harm.
WARNING: Before performing any motor maintenance procedure, be sure that
the equipment connected to the motor shaft cannot cause shaft
rotation. If the load can cause shaft rotation, disconnect the load
from the motor shaft before maintenance is performed. Unexpected
mechanical rotation of the motor parts can cause injury or motor
damage.
WARNING: Disconnect all electrical power from the motor windings and
accessory devices before disassembly of the motor. Electrical
shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING: Do not use non UL/CSA listed explosion proof motors in the
presence of flammable or combustible vapors or dust. These
motors are not designed for atmospheric conditions that require
explosion proof operation.
Section 1
General Information
If you have any questions or are uncertain about any statement or procedure, or if yo
require additional information please contact your Baldor distributor or an Authorized
Baldor Service Center.
Section 1
General Information
Receiving Each Baldor Electric Motor is thoroughly tested at the factory and carefully packaged for
shipment. When you receive your motor, there are several things you should do
immediately.
1. Observe the condition of the shipping container and report any damage
immediately to the commercial carrier that delivered your motor.
2. Verify
number that the on
listed part number
your of theorder.
purchase motor you received is the same as the part
Storage If the motor is not put into service immediately, the motor must be stored in a clean, dry
and warm location. Several precautionary steps must be performed to avoid motor
damage during storage.
1. Use a “Megger” periodically to ensure that the integrity of the winding insulation
has been maintained. Record the Megger readings. Immediately investigate
any significant drop in insulation resistance.
2. Do not lubricate bearings during storage. Motor bearings are packed with
grease at the factory. Excessive grease can damage insulation quality.
3. Rotate motor shaft at least 10 turns every two months during storage (more
frequently if possible). This will prevent bearing damage due to storage.
4. If the storage location is damp or humid, the motor windings must be protected
from moisture. This can be done by applying power to the motors’ space
heater (if available) while the motor is in storage.
Unpacking Each Baldor motor is packaged for ease of handling and to prevent entry of
contaminants.
1. To avoid condensation inside the motor, do not unpack until the motor has
reached room temperature. (Room temperature is the temperature of the room
in which it will be installed). The packing provides insulation from temperature
changes during transportation.
2. When the motor has reached room temperature, remove all protective wrapping
material from the motor.
Handling The motor should be lifted using the lifting lugs or eye bolts provided.
1. Use the lugs or eye bolts provided to lift the motor. Never attempt to lift the
motor and additional equipment connected to the motor by this method. The
lugs or eye bolts provided are designed to lift only the motor. Never lift the
motor by the motor shaft or the hood of a WPII motor.
2. When lifting a WPII (Weather Proof Type 2) motor, do not lift the motor by
inserting lifting lugs into holes on top of the cooling hood. These lugs are to be
used for hood removal only. A spreader bar should be used to lift the motor by
the cast lifting lugs located on the motor frame.
3. If the motor must be mounted to a plate with the driven equipment such as
pump, compressor etc., it may not be possible to lift the motor alone. For this
case, the assembly should be lifted by a sling around the mounting base. The
entire assembly can be lifted as an assembly for installation. Do not lift using
the motor lugs or eye bolts provided.
Section 2
Installation & Operation
Overview Installation should conform to the National Electrical Code as well as local codes and
practices. When other devices are coupled to the motor shaft, be sure to install protec
devices to prevent future accidents. Some protective devices include, coupling, belt
guard, chain guard, shaft covers etc. These protect against accidental contact with
moving parts. Machinery that is accessible to personnel should provide further protec
in the form of guard rails, screening, warning signs etc.
Location It is important that motors be installed in locations that are compatible with motor
enclosure and ambient conditions. Improper selection of the motor enclosure and
ambient conditions can lead to reduced operating life of the motor.
Proper ventilation for the motor must be provided. Obstructed airflow can lead to
reduction of motor life.
1. Open Drip−Proof/WPI motors are intended for use indoors where atmosphere i
relatively clean, dry, well ventilated and non −corrosive.
2. Totally Enclosed and WPII motors may be installed where dirt, moisture or dus
present and in outdoor locations.
Severe Duty, IEEE 841 and Washdown Duty enclosed motors are designed for
installations with high corrosion or excessive moisture conditions. These motors shou
not be placedvapors,
combustible into andust
environment where there
or any combustible is the presence
material, of flammable
unless specifically or
designed fo
this type of service.
Mounting The motor must be securely installed to a rigid foundation or mounting surface to
minimize vibration and maintain alignment between the motor and shaft load. Failure
provide a proper mounting surface may cause vibration, misalignment and bearing
damage.
Foundation caps and sole plates are designed to act as spacers for the equipment th
support. If these devices are used, be sure that they are evenly supported by the
foundation or mounting surface.
After installation is complete and accurate alignment of the motor and load is
accomplished, the base should be grouted to the foundation to maintain this alignmen
The standard
sliding rails aremotor base for
designed is designed
horizontalfor horizontal
mounting or vertical
only. Consultmounting. Adjustable
your Baldor distributoro
authorized Baldor Service Center for further information.
Alignment Accurate alignment of the motor with the driven equipment is extremely important.
1. Direct Coupling
For direct drive, use flexible couplings if possible. Consult the drive or equipmen
manufacturer for more information. Mechanical vibration and roughness during
operation may indicate poor alignment. Use dial indicators to check alignment. T
space between coupling hubs should be maintained as recommended by the
coupling manufacturer.
2. End-Play Adjustment
The axial position of the motor frame with respect to its load is also extremely
Section 1
General Information
Doweling & Bolting After proper alignment is verified, dowel pins should be inserted through the motor feet
into the foundation. This will maintain the correct motor position should motor removal be
required. (Baldor motors are designed for doweling.)
1. Drill dowel holes in diagonally opposite motor feet in the locations provided.
2. Drill corresponding holes in the foundation.
3. Ream all holes.
4. Install proper fitting dowels.
5. Mounting bolts must be carefully tightened to prevent changes in alignment. Use a
flat washer and lock washer under each nut or bolt head to hold the motor feet
secure. Flanged nuts or bolts may be used as an alternative to washers.
Power Connection Motor and control wiring, overload protection, disconnects, accessories and grounding
should conform to the National Electrical Code and local codes and practices.
Conduit Box For ease of making connections, an oversize conduit box is provided. The box can be
rotated 360° in 90° increments. Auxiliary conduit boxes are provided on some motors for
accessories such as space heaters, RTD’s etc.
AC Power Connect the motor leads as shown on the connection diagram located on the name plate
or inside the cover on the conduit box. Be sure the following guidelines are met:
1. AC power is within ±10% of rated voltage with rated frequency. (See motor name
plate for ratings).
OR
2. AC power is within ±5% of rated frequency with rated voltage.
OR
3. A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10% (sum of absolute values) of
rated values, provided the frequency variation does not exceed ±5% of rated
frequency.
Performance within these voltage and frequency variations are shown in Figure 2-2.
Section 1
General Information
)
% +10
(
e Full -Load
c Power
n Current
a Factor
m
r +5
o
f
r
e
P
r 0
o
t
o
M Efficiency
n Efficiency
i −5
s
e
g
n −10
a
h
C
−15
Power
Maximum Factor
Torque
−20
−15 −10 −5 0 +5 +10 +15
Voltage Variations (%)
Section 1
General Information
First Time Start Up Be sure that all power to motor and accessories is off. Be sure the motor shaft is
disconnected from the load and will not cause mechanical rotation of the motor shaft.
1. Make sure that the mechanical installation is secure. All bolts and nuts are tightened
etc.
2. If motor has been in storage or idle for some time, check winding insulation integrity
with a Megger.
3. Inspect all electrical connections for proper termination, clearance, mechanical
strength and electrical continuity.
4. Be sure all shipping materials and braces (if used) are removed from motor shaft.
5. Manually rotate the motor shaft to ensure that it rotates freely.
6. Replace all panels and covers that were removed during installation.
7. Momentarily apply power and check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft.
8. If motor rotation is wrong, be sure power is off and change the motor lead
connections. Verify rotation direction before you continue.
9. Start the motor and ensure operation is smooth without excessive vibration or noise.
If so, run the motor for 1 hour with no load connected.
10. After 1 hour of operation, disconnect power and connect the load to the motor shaft.
Verify all coupling guards and protective devices are installed. Ensure motor is
properly ventilated.
Coupled Start Up This procedure assumes a coupled start up. Also, that the first time start up procedure
was successful.
1. Check the coupling and ensure that all guards and protective devices are installed.
2. Check that the coupling is properly aligned and not binding.
3. The first coupled start up should be with no load. Apply power and verify that the
load is not transmitting excessive vibration back to the motor though the coupling or
the foundation. Vibration should be at an acceptable level.
4. Run for approximately 1 hour with the driven equipment in an unloaded condition.
The equipment can now be loaded and operated within specified limits. Do not exceed
the name plate ratings for amperes for steady continuous loads.
Jogging and Repeated Starts Repeated starts and/or jogs of induction motors generally reduce the life of the motor
winding insulation. A much greater amount of heat is produced by each acceleration or
jog than by the same motor under full load. If it is necessary to repeatedly start or jog the
motor, it is advisable to check the application with your local Baldor distributor or Baldor
Service Center.
Heating - Duty rating and maximum ambient temperature are stated on the motor name
plate. Do not exceed these values. If there is any question regarding safe operation,
contact your local Baldor distributor or Baldor Service Center.
Section 3
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Relubrication Intervals Recommended relubrication intervals are shown in Table 3-1. It is important to realize
that the recommended intervals of Table 3-1 are based on average use.
Some motor designs use different bearings on each motor end. This is normally indicated on the motor nameplate.
In this case, the larger bearing is installed on the motor Drive endplate. For best relubrication results, only use the
appropriate amount of grease for each bearing size (not the same for both).
Table 3-4 Bearings Sizes and Types
Bearing Description
(These are the “Large” bearings (Shaft End) in each frame size)
rame ze
Weight of Grease to Volume of grease
NEMA (IEC)
Bearing add * to be added
oz (Grams) in3 teaspoon
56 to 140 (90) 6203 0.08 (2.4) 0.15 0.5
140 (90) 6205 0.15 (3.9) 0.2 0.8
180 (100−112) 6206 0.19 (5.0) 0.3 1.0
210 (132) 6307 0.30 (8.4) 0.6 2.0
250 (160) 6309 0.47 (12.5) 0.7 2.5
280 (180) 6311 0.61 (17) 1.2 3.9
320 (200) 6312 0.76 (20.1) 1.2 4.0
360 (225) 6313 0.81 (23) 1.5 5.2
400 (250) 6316 1.25 (33) 2.0 6.6
440 (280) 6319 2.12 (60) 4.1 13.4
5000 to 5800 (315−450) 6328 4.70 (130) 9.2 30.0
5000 to 5800 (315−450) NU328 4.70 (130) 9.2 30.0
360 to 449 (225−280) NU319 2.12 (60) 4.1 13.4
AC Induction Servo
76 Frame 180 (112) 6207 0.22 (6.1) 0.44 1.4
77 Frame 210 (132) 6210 0.32 (9.0) 0.64 2.1
80 Frame 250(160) 6213 0.49 (14.0) 0.99 3.3
* Weight in grams = .005 DB
of grease to
be added
Note: Not all bearing sizes are listed. For intermediate bearing sizes, use the
grease volume for the next larger size bearing.
Caution: To avoid damage to motor bearings, grease must be kept free of dirt
For an extremely dirty environment, contact your Baldor distributor
an authorized Baldor Service Center for additional information.
Relubrication Procedure Be sure that the grease you are adding to the motor is compatible with the grease
already in the motor. Consult your Baldor distributor or an authorized service center
grease other than the recommended type is to be used.
Caution: Do not over−lubricate motor as this may cause premature bearing
failure.
With Grease Outlet Plug
1. With the motor stopped, clean all grease fittings with a clean cloth.
2. Remove grease outlet plug.
Caution: Over−lubricating can cause excessive bearing temperatures,
premature lubrication breakdown and bearing failure.
3. Add the recommended amount of grease.
4. Operate the motor for 15 minutes with grease plug removed.
This allows excess grease to purge.
Section 1
General Information
Class B Temp Rise 80°C Class F Temp Rise 105°C Class H Temp Rise 125°C
Motor Load (Typical Design)
Alarm Trip Alarm Trip Alarm Trip
Rated Load 130 140 155 165 175 185
Rated Load 140 150 160 165 180 185
to 1.15 S.F.
Note: Winding RTDs are factory production installed, not from Mod−Express.
When Class H temperatures are used, consider bearing temperatures and relubrication requirements.
High Standard*
Temperature** 95
110 100
115 85
105 95
110
Note: * Bearing temperature limits are for standard design motors operating at Class B temperature rise.
** High temperature lubricants include some special synthetic oils and greases.
Greases that may be substituted that are compatible with Polyrex EM (but considered as
“standard” lubricants) include the following:
− Texaco Polystar − Rykon Premium #2 − Chevron SRI #2
− Mobilith SHC−100 − Pennzoil Pennzlube EM−2 − Chevron Black Pearl
− Darmex 707 − Darmex 711 − Petro−Canada Peerless LLG
See the motor nameplate for replacement grease or oil recommendation.
Contact Baldor application engineering for special lubricants or further clarifications.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 362/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 363/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Stock P/N FE11790 / Madison P/N ARTS-01-A-0-0-B00-060-0.875
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
Madison Electric Products ring tachometers are a Madison Electric ring tachometer kits include a
convenient and efficient way to monitor motor shaft precision machined ring tachometer with a drop-in
RPM when using NEMA “C”-face or metric flanged analog or Hall effect speed sensor (no adjustmen
or faced motors. The ring tachometers are designed needed), four mounting bolts, conduit connection and
with a dual “C”-face mount to fit between your motor a standard 30, 60, or 120 tooth gear.
and gearbox, brake, clutch, etc…enabling the
mounting of a pickup without the need for an auxiliary
shaft or a coupling.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 364/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
• Speed switches
• Direction sensing
• On-the-floor monitoring
Application notes
One of the biggest complaints heard on the floor of Useful in any industry, the ring tachometer provides a
plants and factories is the failure rate of non- simple and accurate method to monitor the speed of
industrialized optical encoders. By applying variable your application. When used in conjunction with an
reluctance and Hall effect technology, Madison intrinsically safe barrier (p/n 9002/11-280-186), the
Electric pickups are not affected by dust, oil, grease, Madison Electric ring tachometer is an ideal solution
dirt, etc…as happens with some optical sensors. The for installing an FM rated system in a volatile area.
sensors in the Madison Electric ring tachometer can Factory set pick-ups insure all the user has to do is
handle shock and vibrations that hinder most high- plug it in and run to have an intrinsically safe feedback.
resolution encoders. Built tough to last in harsh See our data sheets on p/n 9002/11-280-186 for
industrial environments, the Madison Electric ring additional information concerning the installation of an
tachometer withstands shock, dirt, and vibrations that instrinscally safe system.
stop most high-resolution encoders.
To satisfy
NEMA single-shafted
“C”-Face, Madisonmotors without
Electric has the standard
worked with
companies and their engineers to design and
produce customized ring tachometers to accom-
modate almost any motor manufactured.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 365/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
Madison Code
Madison Frame Siz
Sizee Pilot Pilot Depth Bolt Circle
Circ OD Shaft
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 366/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
(mm
in.)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 367/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
Plug ‘n Pla
y Model AR TS-01/02
TS-01/02
Nema “C” F
F
ace-Mounted Motor Ring T ac hometer
hometer Kits
Description
Models ARTS-01/02 Ring Tachometers are easily installed on foot- Wiring connections to the sensor are made through the gasketed junction
mounted motors with “C” face mount end bells, or between a motor box lid, and provide right or left conduit entry. A thread plug is provided
and gear case flange. The one piece cast aluminum ARTS Ring Tach with the kit for sealing the unused conduit entry.
and junction box is precision machined with a factory pre-set sensor
gap. With our unique design, the sensor drops in at a constant Combining a Madison Electric Ring Tachometer with our Model A300
predetermined gap, and is ready for immediate installation. Analog Rate Indication Meter or our Model ADT-800 Digital Rate Mete
completes your speed sensing and rate indication system.
Ring kits include a 60-tooth sensing gear, a drop-in Analog or Hall
Effect Speed Sensor, and mounting hardware. Additional kits include
10-tooth, 30-tooth, 120-tooth, 200-tooth, and 240-tooth gears.
ARTS-01 Ring Tachometer
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 368/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
2.50" 6.00"
Ø .096
50
E
40
G
A
T 30
L
O
V 20
P
-
P
10
0
0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020
AIRGAP
70
60
E
G50
A
T 40
L
O
V 30
P
-
P 20
10
0
0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020
AIRGAP
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 369/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
SHIELD WIRE
STAINLESS STEEL CASE
PVC JACKET
POSITIONING
Ø .373 ALL WIRE
SNAP RING
.370 ENDS TINNED
MADI SON
WHITE
BLACK
20 GA.
1500-2610 RED
2.50" 6.00"
Sensor
Shaft Dia. Gear p/n Hall Effect Ring Tach Kit
Motor Frame Size Ring No. Magnetic
(Gear Bore) (Ref) Speed Model No.
Pick-up
Sensor
X ARTS-01-A
56C 5 / 8" ARTS-01 4000-0902
X ARTS-01-Z
X ARTS-01-A
143TC, 145TC, 182C, 184C 7 / 8" ARTS-01 4000-0903
X ARTS-01-Z
X ARTS-02-A
182TC, 184TC, 213C, 215C 1-1 / 8" ARTS-02 4000-0908
X ARTS-02-Z
X ARTS-02-A
213TC, 215TC, 254UC, 256UC 1-3 / 8" ARTS-02 4000-0909
X ARTS-02-Z
X ARTS-02-A
254TC, 256TC 1-5 / 8" ARTS-02 4000-0910
X ARTS-02-Z
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 370/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 371/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
60
60T
T 23
23D
DP
P 0..6
0 52
05
0 2
2..5
57
70
0 1..2
1 25
50
0 0..3
0 30
00
0 0..1
0 17
70
0 5
55
5 iin
n.. llb
bs
s.. 5
50
00
00
0RRP
PM
M 40
400
00
0--0
11
9070
0
60T 23DP 0.875 2.570 1.500 0.300 0.170 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-0975
60T 11DP 1.125 5.360 2.000 0.300 0.200 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-1600
60T 11DP 1.375 5.360 2.000 0.300 0.200 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-1610
60T 11DP 1.625 5.360 2.500 0.300 0.200 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-1620
120T 42DP 0.500 2.895 1.380 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-2001
120T 36DP 0.625 3.377 2.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-2000
120T 36DP 0.875 3.377 2.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-2010
Hub type gear
120T 24DP 1.125 5.098 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-2200
not applicable
120T 24DP 1.375 5.098 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-2210
for Plug-n-Play
120T 24DP 1.625 5.098 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-2220
200T 42DP 0.625 4.810 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4300
200T 42DP 0.875 4.810 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4310
200T 42DP 1.125 4.810 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4320
200T 42DP 1.250 4.810 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4360
200T 42DP 1.375 4.810 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4377
200T 42DP 1.625 4.810 3.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4380
200T 48DP 14mm 4.210 2.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4500
200T 48DP 25mm 4.210 2.000 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4515
200T 42DP 30mm 4.810 2.060 0.300 0.250 55 in. lbs. 5000 RPM 4000-4370
Definitions
Pitch – The distance between similar, equally spaced tooth surfaces, in Pressure Angle – The angle between a tooth profile and a radial line a
a given direction and along a given curve or line. The single word “pitch” its pitch point. This has no significant effect on performance of the gea
without qualification has been used to designate circular pitch, axial for exciting magnetic pickups. Pickups can be used with any pressure
pitch, and diametral pitch, but such confusing usage should be avoided. angle.
Pitch Circle – A circle, the radius of which is equal to the distance Outside Diameter (OD) – The outside diameter is the overall diamete
from the gear axis to the pitch point. of the gear to the top of the teeth. The OD is used to calculate surface
speed when the gear is used to excite a magnetic pickup.
Pitch Diameter – The diameter of the pitch circle described by the
tooth-to-tooth contact point when running in mesh with the teeth of Surface Speed – The output of a magnetic pickup is determined by the
another gear. This point is roughly halfway between the root (bottom) linear surface speed of the outside diameter of the passing gear teeth
and the tip of the gear tooth. The pitch diameter is slightly smaller than Surface speed is normally expressed in inches/second.
the outside diameter of the gear.
Formulas
Number of Teeth
Diametral Pitch =
Pitch Diameter
Number of teeth + 2
Outside Diameter =
Diametral Pitch
RPM x OD x π
Surface Speed in inches/second =
60
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 372/458
le of Contents
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS 9330 Progress Parkway • Mentor, OH 44060 • (800) 424-5757
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY Fax: (440) 639-8365 • e-mail: madisonsales@thermotion.com
NEMA C-F
ace & IEC Metric Motor Frame Mounted
Ring T
ac hometer
hometer Or dering
dering Inf
ormation
ART - - - - - - -
When ordering, fill in the above chart to determine your part number. Motor frame sizes can be found in the charts in this
section. If you are unable to find your motor frame or require an OEM custom lid, please contact the Madison Electric
Sales Department (800-424-5757).
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 373/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
MC1000 Series
Installation and Operation Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 374/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
NOTE!
The manual covers software version M108314 and above.
See paramter 63 for the software version of the drive you are working with.
If you are working with an earlier software releaas, you will not have all of
the functionality described in this manual, but the functionlity of the drive is
fully documented in this manual.
If you are working with M108313 or ealier, parameters 69 and 70 are
described in this manual as parameters 98 and 99.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 375/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
Table of Contents
1.0 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 PRODUCTS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 PRODUCT CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4
1.5 RECEIVING
CUSTOMER .MODIFICATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1
1
2.0 MC1000 SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.0 MC1000 MODEL DESIGNATION CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.0 MC1000 DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5.0 MC1000 RATINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6.0 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.1 DESCRIPTION OF AC MOTOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.2 DRIVE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.0
7.1 INSTALLATION . . . . A. .LONG
INSTALLATION AFTER . . . . .PERIOD
. . . . . . OF
. . .STORAGE
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .... .. .. .. .. .18
19
7.2 EXPLOSION PROOF APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
8.0 INPUT AC REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.1 INPUT AC POWER REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.2 INPUT FUSING AND DISCONNECT REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
9.0 VOLTAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10.0 POWER WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
11.0 MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
12.0 INITIAL POWER UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
13.0 KEYPAD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
13.1 KEYPAD FUNCTIONS (IN LOCAL MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
13.2 MC1000 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
14.0 CONTROL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
15.0 MC1000 CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
15.1 MC1000 TERMINAL STRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
15.2 TWO-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
15.3 THREE-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
15.4 SPEED POT AND PRESET SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
16.0 PROGRAMMING THE MC1000 DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
16.1 PROGRAMMING THE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
16.2 PARAMETER ACCESS USING SPEED DIAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
17.0 PARAMETER MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
18.0 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
19.0 MC1000 PID SET POINT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
19.1 FEEDBACK DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
19.2 THE SYSTEM - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.3 PID CONTROL - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.4 SET POINT REFERENCE SOURCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
19.5 TUNING THE PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
19.6 MC1000 DISPLAY IN PID MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 376/458
20.0 TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 377/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 PRODUCTS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL
This manual covers the AC Tech MC1000 Series Variable Frequency Drive.
1.2 PRODUCT CHANGES
AC Technology Corporation reserves the right to discontinue or make modifications
to the design of its products and manuals without prior notice, and holds no obligation
to make modifications to products sold previously. AC Technology Corporation also
holds no liability for losses of any kind which may result from this action. Instruction
manuals with the most up-to-date information are available for download from the
AC Tech web site (www.actech.com).
1.3 WARRANTY
AC Technology Corporation warrants the MC Series AC motor control to be free
of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 24 months from the date
of shipment from AC Tech's factory. An MC Series control, or any component
contained therein, which under normal use, becomes defective within the stated
warranty time period, shall be returned to AC Technology Corporation, freight
prepaid, for examination (contact AC Technology Corporation for authorization prior
to returning any product). AC Technology Corporation reserves the right to make
the final determination as to the validity of a warranty claim, and sole obligation is
to repair or replace only components which have been rendered defective due to
faulty material or workmanship. No warranty claim will be accepted for components
which have been damaged due to mishandling, improper installation, unauthorized
repair and/or alteration of the product, operation in excess of design specifications
or other misuse, or improper maintenance. AC Technology Corporation makes no
warranty that its products are compatible with any other equipment, or to any specific
application, to which they may be applied and shall not be held liable for any other
consequential damage or injury arising from the use of its products.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied.
No other person, firm or corporation is authorized to assume, for AC Technology
Corporation, any other liability in connection with the demonstration or sale
of its products.
1.4 RECEIVING
Inspect all cartons for damage which may have occurred during shipping. Carefully
unpack equipment and inspect thoroughly for damage or shortage. Report
any damage to carrier and/or shortages to supplier. All major components and
connections should be examined for damage and tightness, with special attention
given to PC boards, plugs, knobs and switches.
1.5 CUSTOMER MODIFICATION
AC Technology Corporation, its sales representatives and distributors, welcome the
opportunity to assist our customers in applying our products. Many customizing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 378/458
options are available to aid in this function. AC Technology Corporation cannot
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 379/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
(MC1000, 480 Vac, 5 HP, Type 1 Enclosure, with a Remote Keypad Assembly)
M1 4 50 B P
Series:
M1 = M1000 Series Variable Speed AC Motor Drive
Input Voltage:
1 = 240/120 Vac (For 110, 115, 120, 230 and 240 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
2 = 240/200 Vac (For 208, 230, and 240 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
4 = 480/400 Vac (For 380, 415, 440, 460 and 480 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
5 = 590/480 Vac (For 440, 460, 480, 575 and 600 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
Rating:
03 = ¼ HP (0.18 kW) 75 = 7½ HP (5.5 kW) 500 = 50 HP (37.5 kW)
05 = ½ HP (0.37 kW) 100 = 10 HP (7.5 kW) 600 = 60 HP (45 kW)
10 = 1 HP (0.75 kW) 150 = 15 HP (11 kW) 750 = 75 HP (55 kW)
15 = 1½ HP (1.1 kW) 200 = 20 HP (15 kW) 1000 100 HP (75 kW)
20 = 2 HP (1.5 kW) 250 = 25 HP (18.5 kW) 1250 = 125 HP (90 kW)
30 = 3 HP (2.2 kW) 300 = 30 HP (22 kW) 1500 = 150 HP (110 kW)
50 / 51 = 5 HP (3.7 kW) 400 = 40 HP (30vkW)
Input Phase:
S = Single phase input only.
No character indicates three phase input only
Enclosure Type:
B = NEMA 1 - General Purpose, vented
C = NEMA 4 - Water-tight and Dust-tight
D = NEMA 12 - Oil-tight and Dust-tight
E = NEMA 4X - Water-tight, Dust-tight, and Corrosion Resistant (Stainless Steel)
Standard Options:
H = Additional Form C Relay circuit board
J = Dynamic Braking circuit board
K = Dynamic Braking & Additional Form C Relay board (not available on all HP sizes - consult factory)
No character when this type of option is not specified
Interface Options:
P = Remote keypad assembly
No character when this type of option is not specified
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 380/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
W D
R H
Conduit Holes: W U IF
WT =< 0.20"
7.86"
Q Q V
S Dia. U = 0.34"
0.88" Dia. V = 0.19"
1.00"
S Dia.
IF W = 10.26"
P T = 0.28"
R U = 0.44"
N T
Dia. Slot V = 0.24"
HP INPUT
MODEL H W D N P Q R S
(kW) VOLTAGE
0.25
240 / 120 M1103SB 7.50 4.70 3.33 2.35 1.60 1.37 5.50 0.88
(0.18)
240 / 120 M1105SB 7.50 6.12 3.63 3.77 1.80 1.37 5.50 0.88
0.5
240 M1205SB 7.50 4.70 3.63 2.35 1.90 1.37 5.50 0.88
(0.37)
240/200 M1205B 7.50 4.70 3.63 2.35 1.90 1.37 5.50 0.88
240 / 120 M1110SB 7.50 6.12 4.22 3.77 2.40 1.37 5.50 0.88
240 M1210SB 7.50 4.70 4.33 2.35 2.60 1.37 5.50 0.88
1
240 / 200 M1210B 7.50 4.70 4.33 2.35 2.60 1.37 5.50 0.88
(0.75)
480 / 400 M1410B 7.50 4.70 3.63 2.35 1.90 1.37 5.50 0.88
590 M1510B 7.50 4.70 3.63 2.35 1.90 1.37 5.50 0.88
240/120 M1115SB 7.50 6.12 4.22 3.77 2.40 1.37 5.50 0.88
1.5
240 M1215SB 7.50 6.12 4.22 3.77 2.40 1.37 5.50 0.88
(1.1)
240/200 M1215B 7.50
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
4.70 4.33 2.35 2.60 1.37 5.50 0.88 381/458
240 M1220SB 7.50 6.12 5.12 3.77 3.30 1.37 5.50 0.88
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
HP INPUT
MODEL H W D N P Q R S
(kW) VOLTAGE
240 M1230SB 7.50 6.12 5.12 3.77 3.30 1.37 5.50 0.88
3 240 / 200 M1230B 7.50 6.12 5.12 3.77 3.30 1.37 5.50 0.88
(2.2) 480 / 400 M1430B 7.50 6.12 5.12 3.77 3.30 1.37 5.50 0.88
590 M1530B 7.50 6.12 5.12 3.77 3.30 1.37 5.50 0.88
240 / 200 M1250B 7.88 7.86 5.94 5.13 3.95 1.50 5.88 1.13
5
480 / 400 M1450B 7.50 6.12 5.12 3.77 3.30 1.37 5.50 0.88
(3.7)
590 M1551B 7.88 7.86 5.94 5.13 3.95 1.50 5.88 1.13
240 / 200 M1275B 9.38 7.86 6.84 3.93 4.19 2.00 5.88 1.13
7.5
(5.5) 480 / 400 M1475B 9.38 7.86 6.25 5.13 3.95 1.50 7.38 1.13
590 M1575B 9.38 7.86 6.25 5.13 3.95 1.50 7.38 1.13
240 / 200 M12100B 11.25 7.86 6.84 3.93 4.19 2.00 7.75 1.38
10
480 / 400 M14100B 9.38 7.86 6.84 3.93 4.19 2.00 5.88 1.13
(7.5)
590 M15100B 9.38 7.86 7.40 3.93 4.19 2.00 5.88 1.13
240/200 M12150B 12.75 7.86 6.84 3.93 4.19 2.00 9.25 1.38
15
480/400 M14150B 11.25 7.86 6.84 3.93 4.19 2.00 7.75 1.38
(11)
590 M15150B 12.75 7.86 6.84 3.93 4.19 2.00 9.75 1.38
240 / 200 M12200B 12.75 10.26 7.74 5.13 5.00 2.50 9.25 1.38
20
480/400 M14200B 12.75 7.86 6.84 3.93 4.19 2.00 9.25 1.38
(15)
590 M15200B 12.75 7.86 7.40 3.93 4.19 2.00 9.25 1.38
240 / 200 M12250B 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.00 2.50 12.25 1.38
25
480/400 M14250B 12.75 10.26 7.74 5.13 5.00 2.50 9.25 1.38
(18.5)
590 M15250B 12.75 10.26 7.74 5.13 5.00 2.50 9.25 1.38
240 / 200 M12300B 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.00 2.50 12.25 1.38
30
(22) 480/400 M14300B 12.75 10.26 7.74 5.13 5.00 2.50 9.25 1.38
590 M15300B 12.75 10.26 8.25 5.13 5.00 2.50 9.25 1.38
40 480/400 M14400B 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.00 2.50 12.25 1.38
(30) 590 M15400B 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.00 2.50 12.25 1.38
50 480/400 M14500B 19.75 10.26 8.55 5.13 5.75 2.50 16.25 1.75
(37.5) 590 M15500B 19.75 10.26 8.55 5.13 5.75 2.50 16.25 1.75
60 480/400 M14600B 19.75 10.26 8.55 5.13 5.75 2.50 16.25 1.75
(45) 590 M15600B 19.75 10.26 8.55 5.13 5.75 2.50 16.25 1.75
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 382/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
W 0.68"
IF W = 13.00" 0.31"
1.50"
H 1.36"
0.36"
Dia.
0.43"
Conduit Holes: IF W > 16.64"
Q Q 1.13" Dia. 1.50"
S Dia.
0.44" 3.00"
Dia.
D
C P
1.36"
INPUT
HP/kW VOLTAGE MODEL H W D N C P Q S
40/30 240 / 200 M12400B 25.00 13.00 10.50 5.56 6.50 6.50 2.62 1.38
75/55 480 / 400 M14750B 29.00 16.64 11.85 7.14 6.88 6.88 3.12 1.75
100/75 480 / 400 M141000B 29.00 24.42 11.85 11.12 7.25 6.50 4.50 2.50
125/90 480 / 400 M141250B 29.00 24.42 11.85 11.12 7.25 6.50 4.50 2.50
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 383/458
7.25"
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
W D
R H
HP INPUT
(kW) VOLTAGE MODEL H W D N P Q R S
0.25
240 / 120 M1103S 7.88 6.12 3.63 3.06 2.00 1.37 5.88 0.88
(0.18)
240 / 120 M1105S 7.88 7.86 3.75 4.80 2.10 1.37 5.88 0.88
0.5
240 M1205S 7.88 6.12 4.35 3.06 2.70 1.37 5.88 0.88
(0.37)
240/200 M1205 7.88 6.12 4.35 3.06 2.70 1.37 5.88 0.88
240 / 200 M1110S 7.88 7.86 4.90 4.80 3.25 1.37 5.88 0.88
240 M1210S 7.88 6.12 4.35 3.06 2.70 1.37 5.88 0.88
1 240 / 200 M1210 7.88 6.12 4.35 3.06 2.70 1.37 5.88 0.88
(0.75)
480 / 400 M1410 7.88 6.12 4.35 3.06 2.70 1.37 5.88 0.88
590 M1510 7.88 6.12 4.35 3.06 2.70 1.37 5.88 0.88
240/120 M1115S 7.88 7.86 4.90 4.80 3.25 1.37 5.88 0.88
1.5
240 M1215S 7.88 7.86 4.90 4.80 3.25 1.37 5.88 0.88
(1.1)
240/200 M1215 7.88 6.12 5.25 3.06 3.60 1.37 5.88 0.88
240 M1220S 7.88 7.86 4.90 4.80 3.25 1.37 5.88 0.88
HP INPUT
MODEL H W D N P Q R S
(kW) VOLTAGE
240 / 200 M1250 9.75 10.26 7.20 5.13 5.25 2.00 7.75 1.13
5
480 / 400 M1450 7.88 7.86 5.90 4.80 4.25 1.37 5.88 0.88
(3.7)
590 M1550 7.88 7.86 5.90 4.80 4.25 1.37 5.88 0.88
240 / 200 M1275 11.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 9.75 1.13
7.5
480 / 400 M1475 9.75 10.26 7.20 5.13 5.25 2.00 7.75 1.13
(5.5)
590 M1575 9.75 10.26 7.20 5.13 5.25 2.00 7.75 1.13
240 / 200 M12100 13.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
10
(7.5) 480 / 400 M14100 11.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 9.75 1.13
590 M15100 11.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 9.75 1.13
240/200 M12150 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 13.75 1.38
15
480/400 M14150 13.25 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
(11)
590 M15150 13.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
240 / 200 M12200D* 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
20
480/400 M14200 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 13.75 1.38
(15)
590 M15200 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 13.75 1.38
240 / 200 M12250D* 20.25 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 16.25 1.38
25
480/400 M14250D* 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
(18.5)
590 M15250D* 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
240 / 200 M12300D* 20.25 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 16.25 1.38
30
480/400 M14300D* 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
(22)
590 M15300D* 15.75 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 11.75 1.38
40 480/400 M14400D* 20.25 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 16.25 1.38
(30) 590 M15400D* 20.25 10.26 8.35 5.13 5.75 2.00 16.25 1.38
50 480/400 M14500D* 21.00 13.72 8.35 5.13 6.10 2.00 16.25 1.38
(37.5) 590 M15500D* 21.00 13.72 8.35 5.13 6.10 2.00 16.25 1.38
60 480/400 M14600D* 21.00 13.72 8.35 5.13 6.10 2.00 16.25 1.38
(45) 590 M15600D* 21.00 13.72 8.35 5.13 6.10 2.00 16.25 1.38
*Models available in NEMA 12 only.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 385/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
0.68"
W
0.31"
R
1.36"
H 1.50"
0.36"
Dia.
IF W = 14.00"
Mounting Tab Detail
0.92"
Q Q 0.43"
Conduit Holes:
1.13" Dia.
1.36"
S Dia.
0.44"
D Dia. 3.00"
P
1.50"
IF W > 18.00"
N
INPUT
HP/kW MODEL H W D N P Q R S
VOLTAGE
75/55 480 / 400 M14750D 37.00 18.00 13.30 7.50 8.00 3.13 7.14 1.75
100/75 480 / 400 M141000D 39.00 26.00 13.30 11.50 9.00 4.50 9.14 2.50
125/90 480 / 400 M141250D 39.00 26.00 13.30 11.50 9.00 4.50 9.14 2.50
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 386/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 387/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 388/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 389/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 390/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
6.0 THEORY
In three phase induction motors the actual shaft speed differs from the synchronous
speed as load is applied. This difference is known as “slip”. Slip is commonly
expressed as a percentage of synchronous speed. A typical value is three percent
at full load.
The strength of the magnetic field in the gap between the rotor and stator is
proportional to the amplitude of the voltage at a given frequency. The output torque
capability of the motor is, therefore, a function of the applied voltage amplitude at
a given frequency. When operated below base (rated) speed, AC motors run in
the range of “constant torque”. Constant torque output is obtained by maintaining
a constant ratio between voltage amplitude (Volts) and frequency (Hertz). For
60 Hz motors rated at 230, 460, and 575 Vac, common values for this V/Hz ratio
are 3.83, 7.66, and 9.58 respectively. Operating with these V/Hz ratios generally
yields optimum torque capability. Operating at lower ratio values results in lower
torque and power capability. Operating at higher ratio values will cause the motor
to overheat. Most standard motors are capable of providing full torque output from
3 to 60 Hz. However, at lower speeds, where motor cooling fans become less
effective, supplemental cooling may be needed to operate at full torque output
continuously.
If the frequency applied to the motor is increased while the voltage remains constant,
torque capability will decrease as speed increases. This will cause the horsepower
capability of the motor to remain approximately constant. Motors run in this mode
when operated above base speed, where drive output voltage is limited by the
input line voltage. This operating range is known as the “constant horsepower”
range. The typical maximum range for constant horsepower is about 2.3 to 1
(60 to 140 Hz). The diagram below depicts the characteristics of a typical AC
induction motor with a 60 Hz base speed.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 391/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
130
30
10
20 40 60 80 100 120
FREQUENCY (Hz)
75%
W
F
L O
50% % E
U
Q
T
R
O E R
W
% P O
25% R S E
H O
%
0%
0% 25% 50% 75% 100%
Variable torque drives usually have a low overload capacity (110% - 120% for
60 seconds), because variable torque applications rarely experience overload
conditions. To optimize efficiency and energy savings, variable torque drives are
usually programmed to follow a variable V/Hz ratio.
The term “constant torque” is not entirely accurate in terms of the actual torque
required for an application. Many constant torque applications have reciprocating
loads, such as vibrating conveyors and punch presses, where the rotational motion
of the motor is being converted to a linear motion. In such cases, the torque required
can vary greatly at different points in the cycle. For constant torque loads, this
fluctuation in torque is not a direct function of speed, as it is with a variable torque
load. As a result, constant torque drives typically have a high overload rating (150%
for 60 seconds) in order to handle the higher peak torque demands. To achieve
maximum torque, constant torque drives follow a constant V/Hz ratio.
Both MC Series product lines (MC1000 and MC3000) have full overload capacity
(150% for 60 seconds, 180% for 30 seconds), so that either one can be used for either
type of application. The V/Hz ratio can also be changed to optimize performance
for either type of application.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 393/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
7.0 INSTALLATION
WARNING!
DRIVES MUST NOT BE INSTALLED WHERE SUBJECTED TO ADVERSE
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS! DRIVES MUST NOT BE INSTALLED
WHERE SUBJECTED TO: COMBUSTIBLE, OILY, OR HAZARDOUS VAPORS
OR DUST; EXCESSIVE MOISTURE OR DIRT; STRONG VIBRATION;
EXCESSIVE AMBIENT TEMPERATURES. CONSULT AC TECHNOLOGY FOR
MORE INFORMATION ON THE SUITABILITY OF A DRIVE TO A PARTICULAR
ENVIRONMENT.
SPACING REQUIREMENTS
SPACING
HP
INCHES mm
0.25 - 5 2 50
7.5 - 25 4 100
30 - 60 6 150
75 - 150 8 200
All drive models MUST be mounted in a vertical position for proper heatsink cooling.
Fans or blowers should be used to insure proper cooling in tight quarters. Do not
mount drives above other drives or heat producing equipment that would
impede the cooling of the drive. Note the ambient operating temperature ratings
for each drive model.
If it is necessary to drill or cut the drive enclosure or panel, extreme care must be
taken to avoid damaging drive components or contaminating the drive with metal
fragments (which cause shorting of electrical circuits). Cover drive components
with a clean cloth to keep out metal chips and other debris. Use a vacuum cleaner
to clean drive components after drilling, even if chips do not appear to be present.
Do not attempt to use positive air pressure to blow chips out of drive, as this tends
to lodge debris under electronic components. Contaminating the drive with metal
chips can cause drive failure and will void the warranty.The MC1000 Series is UL
approved for solid state motor overload protection. Therefore, a separate thermal
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 395/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
Severe damage to the drive can result if it is operated after a long period of
storage or inactivity without reforming the DC bus capacitors!
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding
three years (due to storage, etc), the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive
can change internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can result in
premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is operated after such a long period
of inactivity or storage.
In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long
period of inactivity, apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the drive/motor system.
expressly
arise from agrees to assume all risk of any loss, cost, or damage that may
such application."
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 396/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Disconnect incoming power and wait three minutes
before servicing the drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
The UL file for this drive shows that it is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, at the drive’s rated
voltage. The CSA file identifies a short-circuit withstand rating of 5,000 RMS
symmetrical amperes at the drives rated voltage.
Three phase voltage imbalance must be less than 2.0% phase to phase. Excessive
phase to phase imbalance can cause severe damage to the drive’s power
components.
Motor voltage should match line voltage in normal applications. The drive’s maximum
output voltage will equal the input voltage. Use extreme caution when using a motor
with a voltage rating which is different from the input line voltage.
8.1.2 SUPPLY TRANSFORMER kVA RATINGS
If the kVA rating of the AC supply transformer is greater than ten times the input
kVA rating of the drive, a drive isolation transformer, or a 2 - 3% input line reactor
(also known as a choke) must be added.
8.2 INPUT FUSING AND DISCONNECT REQUIREMENTS
A circuit breaker or a disconnect switch with fuses must be provided in accordance
with the National Electric Code (NEC) and all local codes.
The MC1000 drive is capable of withstanding up to 150% current overload for 60
seconds. Select a fuse or magnetic trip circuit breaker rated at 1.5 times the input
current rating of the drive (the minimum size should be 10 amps, regardless of input
current rating). Refer to Section 5.0 - MC1000 RATINGS.Minimum voltage rating
of the protection device should be 250 Vac for 240/120 Vac and 240/200 Vac rated
drives, and 600 Vac for 480/400 Vac and 590/480 Vac drives.
Use UL Class CC or Class T current-limiting type fuses with low I 2 T values, rated
at 200,000 AIC. Recommended fuses are Bussman type KTK-R, JJN, and JJS,
or equivalent.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 397/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Wait three minutes after disconnecting incoming power
before servicing drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
Note drive input and output current ratings and check applicable electrical codes
for required wire type and size, grounding requirements, over current protection,
and incoming power disconnect, before wiring the drive. Size conservatively to
minimize voltage drop.
Input fusing and a power disconnect switch or contactor MUST be wired in series
with terminals L1, L2, and L3 (L1 and L2 if input is single phase). If one has not been
supplied by AC Technology Corporation, a disconnect means must be wired during
installation. This disconnect must be used to power down the drive when servicing,
or when the drive is not to be operated for a long period of time, but should not be
used to start and stop the motor.
Repetitive cycling of a disconnect or input contactor (more than once every
two minutes) may cause damage to the drive.
10.1 WIRING FOR SINGLE PHASE OR THREE PHASE INPUT
If the drive is name plated for 240/120 Vac single phase input, wire the input to
terminals L1 and N and jumper terminals L1 to L2 for 120 Vac input voltage, or wire
to terminals L1 and L2 (do not wire to N) for 240 Vac input voltage. Refer to Section
11.0 - MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM.
If the drive is name plated for three phase input only, wire the input to terminals
L1, L2, and L3.
All three power output wires, from terminals T1, T2, and T3 to the motor, must be
kept tightly bundled and run in a separate conduit away from all other power and
control wiring.
It is not recommended to install contactors or disconnect switches between398/458
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
the
drive and motor. Operating such devices while the drive is running can potentially
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
L1 L2 N
T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 N
DISCONNECT
MEANS 240 Vac SINGLE
THREE PHASE PHASE INPUT
(REQUIRED)
WIRING DIAGRAM
AC MOTOR GND
FUSED INPUT
VOLTAGE
WARNING!
Do not connect incoming AC power to output terminals T1, T2, or T3! Severe
damage to the drive will result.
Before attempting to operate the drive, motor, and driven equipment be sure all
procedures pertaining to installation and wiring have been properly followed.
WARNING!
Severe damage to the drive can result if it is operated after a long period of
storage or inactivity without reforming the DC bus capacitors!
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding
three years (due to storage, etc), the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive
can changefailure
premature internally,
of theresulting in ifexcessive
capacitors the drive leakage current.
is operated This acan
after such longresult in
period
of inactivity or storage.
In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long
period of inactivity, apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the drive/motor system.
Disconnect the driven load from the motor. Verify that the drive input terminals (L1,
L2, and L3) are wired to the proper input voltage per the nameplate rating of the
drive.
WARNING!
DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals T1, T2, and T3! Do
not cycle input power to the drive more than once every two minutes. Damage
to the drive will result.
Energize the incoming power line. The LCD display should light and flash “TESTING”
and then show the voltage and horsepower rating of the drive. The display should
then show “STOP > 20.00 HZ” which indicates that the drive is in a STOP condition,
and the speed set point is 20.00 Hz:
If the display does not appear, remove the incoming power, wait three minutes for
the bus capacitors to discharge, and verify correct installation and wiring. If the
wiring is correct, re-apply incoming power and note the display for drive status. If
the display still does not appear contact the factory for assistance.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 400/458
NOTE 1: If the drive's display is blank after power up, and it is a model equipped with
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
If the drive powers up correctly, follow the procedure given below to check the
motor rotation:
1. Use the key to decrease the speed set point to the minimum value allowed
(.50 Hz if Parameter 10 - MIN FRQ has not been changed).
2. Press the START key. The drive should indicate RUN, but if the speed set
point
speedisset
.50point
Hz, the
untilmotor may not
the motor rotate.
starts Press the key to increase the
to rotate.
3. If the motor is rotating in the wrong direction, press the STOP key and
remove power from the drive. Wait three minutes for the bus capacitors to
discharge, and swap any two of the motor wires connected to T1, T2, and
T3.
NOTE 2: The drive is phase insensitive with respect to incoming line voltage.
Therefore, to change the motor rotation, the phases must be swapped at the drive
output terminals or at the motor.
START/STOP To start
press thethe drive,key.
STOP press the START key. To stop the drive,
NOTE: The STOP key is active in both LOCAL and
REMOTE modes.
SPEED SET POINT To increase the speed set point, press the key. To
decrease the speed set point, press the key.
NOTE: The and keys will only function if another speed
reference source is not selected.
FORWARD/REVERSE To change rotation direction, press the FWD/REV key to
select the desired direction, and then press the ENTER key
within three seconds to confirm the change.
NOTE: Parameter 27 - ROTATION must be set to FWD &
REV for this key to be active.
AUTO/MANUAL To toggle between AUTOMATIC (terminal strip) and
MANUAL (keypad) speed control, press the AUTO/MAN
key to select the desired mode, and then press the ENTER
key within three seconds to confirm the change.
NOTE: Parameter 28 - AUTO/MAN must be set to BOTH
for this key to be active. See Section 14.0 - CONTROL
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 401/458
WIRING for information on automatic speed references.
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
When the drive is in the STOP mode, there are three possible displays. The first is
the SPEED display, which looks like this:
DRIVE SPEED
STATUS SET POINT
DIRECTION SPEED
(FORWARD) UNITS
NOTE: See Parameter 31 - UNITS for the SPEED UNITS display options.
Pressing the ENTER key will change the display from the SPEED indication to the
% LOAD indication:
DRIVE PERCENT
STATUS LOAD
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
Pressing the ENTER key again will change the display from the % LOAD indication
to the VAC (motor voltage) indication:
DRIVE MOTOR
STATUS VOLTAGE
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
Pressing ENTER again will change the display back to the SPEED indication.402/458
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
The following table shows the possible DRIVE STATUS indications that can appear
on the drive display:
DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
STOP Drive to STOP mode - No output to motor.
RUN Drive is in RUN mode and is within + 0.3 Hz of the speed set point.
Drive has shut down due to a FAULT condition. If the fault condition has
FAULT passed, pressing the STOP key will clear the fault and return the
drive to the STOP mode.
DRIVE SPEED
STATUS SET POINT
DIRECTION SPEED
(FORWARD) UNITS
As in the STOP mode, the ENTER key can be used to toggle the display from
SPEED to % LOAD to VAC (motor voltage):
DRIVE PERCENT
STATUS LOAD
DRIVE MOTOR
STATUS VOLTAGE
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
NOTE: During acceleration and deceleration to the SPEED SET POINT, the DRIVE
STATUS will show the actual drive speed. When the SPEED SET POINT is reached,
the DRIVE STATUS will change to RUN (or STOP if the drive is decelerating to a
STOP).
13.2.3 MC1000 DISPLAY IN FAULT MODE
When the drive trips into a fault, the display will automatically change to the FAULT
display, which indicates the FAULT MESSAGE:
DRIVE FAULT
STATUS MESSAGE
FAULT: OVERLOAD
In FAULT mode, the ENTER key will toggle the display between four screens:
FAULT, SPEED, % LOAD and VAC. The DRIVE STATUS for these displays will
be FAULT. An example is shown below of the drive in the FAULT mode displaying
SPEED.
DRIVE SPEED
STATUS SET POINT
DIRECTION SPEED
(FORWARD) UNITS
NOTE: To clear a FAULT, press the STOP key, issue a remote STOP command
at TB-1, or use TB-13D (refer to Parameter 50 - TB13D).
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 404/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
The table below shows the possible SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indications
for the auxiliary mode display:
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 405/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
equivalent.
Torque the control terminals to 2 lb-in (0.2 Nm). Be careful not to overtorque the
control terminals, as this will cause damage to the terminal strip. This is not covered
under warranty and can only be repaired by replacing the control board.
14.1.3 TB-2: CIRCUIT COMMON
The TB-2 terminals are used as circuit common for the start/stop, forward/reverse,
input select, local/remote, analog input, and analog output functions. There are three
TB-2 terminals available on the terminal strip, and they are all internally connected
to each other on the main control board. If necessary TB-2 may be connected to
chassis ground.
NOTE: TB-2 MUST be connected to chassis ground when using serial
communications.
14.1.4 SURGE SUPPRESSION ON RELAYS
Current and voltage surges and spikes in the coils of contactors, relays, solenoids,
etc, near or connected to the drive, can cause erratic drive operation. Therefore,
a snubber circuit should be used on coils associated with the drive. For AC coils,
snubbers should consist of a resistor and a capacitor in series across the coil.
For DC coils, a free-wheeling or fly back diode should be placed across the coil.
Snubbers are typically available from the manufacturer of the device.14.2
START/STOP AND SPEED CONTROL
14.2.1 REMOTE MODE SELECTION
The REMOTE mode can be selected by one of two methods:
1. Program Parameter 30 - CONTROL to REMOTE, or:
2. Program CONTROL to BOTH, set the TB-13A or TB-13C function (see
Parameter 47 or 49) to LOCAL SELECT, and DO NOT make a contact closure
between TB-13A or TB-13C and TB-2 (making the contact closure will select
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 406/458
LOCAL mode).
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
STOP (TB-1) and EXTERNAL FAULT (TB-13D) circuitry may be disabled if
parameters are reset to factory defaults! The drive must be reprogrammed after a
RESET in order to insure proper operation (see Parameter 65 - PROGRAM).
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
INJURY TO PERSONNEL!
WARNING!
This method requires TB-13C to be set for RUN REVERSE, which will disable
TB-1 as a STOP switch! Incorrect use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment
and/or injury to personnel! Refer to Parameter 49 - TB13C.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 408/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
PRESET SPEEDS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 409/458
TB-13A can be programmed to select SPEED #1, TB-13B to select SPEED #2,
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
JOG
The JOG function only works when the drive is in REMOTE mode, and only when
the drive is in a STOP condition. TB-13B can be programmed to select either JOG
FORWARD or JOG REVERSE. The jog speed is set by PRESET SPEED #2. Close
TB-13B to TB-2 to JOG, and open the contact to STOP.
WARNING!
When operating in JOG mode, the STOP key WILL NOT stop the drive. To stop
the drive, the contact between TB-13B and TB-2 must be opened.
the DECisFREQ
contact function,
opened. DEC FREQand will
willcause the
operate speed
when theset point
drive is intoRUN
decrease until
mode or STOPthe
mode. Closing TB-13B to TB-2 will activate the INC FREQ function, and will cause
the speed set point to increase until the contact is opened. INC FREQ will only
operate when the drive is in RUN mode.
NOTE: If TB-13A, TB-13B, and TB-13C are all programmed to select speed
references, and two or three of the terminals are closed to TB-2, the higher terminal
has priority and will override the others. For example, if TB-13A is programmed
to select 0-10VDC, and TB-13C is programmed to select PRESET SPEED #3,
closing both terminals to TB-2 will cause the drive to respond to PRESET SPEED
#3, because TB-13C overrides TB-13A.
14.2.7 ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNALS
There are two terminals that can supply analog output signals proportional to
output frequency or load. Terminal TB-10A can provide a 0-10 VDC or a 2-10 VDC
signal proportional to output frequency, and TB-10B can provide the same signals
proportional to load. The 2-10 VDC signals can be converted to a 4-20 mA signal
using a resistor in series with the signal such that the total load resistance is 500
Ohms. See Parameters: 42 - TB10A OUT, 43 - @TB10A, 44 - TB10B OUT, and
There are also two open-collector outputs at terminals TB-14 and TB-15. The open-
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
collector circuit is a current-sinking type rated at 30 VDC and 40 mA maximum.410/458
An
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 411/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
FWD REV
(see Note 2)
MAINTAINED
RUN/STOP
CONTACT
NOTES:
1. Close TB-1 to TB-2 to RUN, and open to STOP.
2. If REVERSE direction is required, ROTATION must be set to FWD&REV,
and TB-13C must be set to START REVERSE (refer to Parameters: 27
FWD REV
(see Note 2)
MOMENTARY MOMENTARY
STOP CONTACT START CONTACT
NOTES:
1. Momentarily close TB-12A to TB-2 to START, and momentarily open TB-1
to TB-2 to STOP.
2. If REVERSE direction is required, ROTATION must be set to FWD&REV,
and TB-13C must be set to START REVERSE (refer to Parameters: 27
- ROTATION, and 49 - TB13C).
If REVERSE is not required, wire the Start button directly to TB-12A
and eliminate the FWD/REV switch.
3. Program TB-13A, 13B, or 13C to select the appropriate speed reference
signal that will control the drive speed (refer to Parameters 47, 48, and
49). When that TB-13 terminal is closed to TB-2, the drive will respond
to the selected speed reference signal. In the diagram above, TB-13A is
programmed to select either a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal.
4. If the contact closure is not made between TB-13A and TB-2 to select a
speed reference, the drive will default to MANUAL speed control, which is 413/458
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
determined by Parameter 29 - MANUAL.
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
SPEED POT
(10 K)
NOTES:
SPEED #4, close any two of the preset speed terminals to TB-2.
4. Speed pot control can be selected by one of two methods. If none of
the preset speeds are selected (all TB-13 terminals are open), the drive
will default to speed pot control if Parameter 29 - MANUAL is set to 0-10
VDC. The speed pot can also be selected if one of the TB-13 terminals is
programmed to select 0-10 VDC and that terminal is closed to TB-2.
5. If REVERSE rotation is required, TB-13C cannot be used to select SPEED
#3. TB-13C must be programmed to select RUN REVERSE or START
REVERSE, leaving only TB-13A and TB-13B to select preset speeds.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 414/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
PROG AUTO
START
RUN MAN
FWD
ENTER STOP
REV
To program the drive, the PROGRAM mode must be entered by pressing the PROG/
RUN button. If the password protection is disabled, pressing the PROG/RUN button
will result in direct entry into the PROGRAM mode. If the password protection is
enabled, the PASSWORD prompt will appear when an attempt is made to enter the
PROGRAM mode. The PASSWORD prompt appears as follows:
PASSWORD 0000
CURSOR
To enter the password, use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll to the password
value, and then press the ENTER key.
Note:
The factory default password is 0019.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 415/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
Once the correct password is entered, the PROGRAM mode will be entered and
the first parameter will be displayed, which is Parameter 0 - LINE VOLTS. This is
shown below:
PARAMETER PARAMETER
NAME VALUE
CURSOR
To scroll through the parameters, use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons on the
keypad. When the desired parameter is found, press the ENTER key to shift the
cursor fromLINE
shifts from the parameter
VOLTS toname to the parameter value. In this example, the cursor
AUTO:
PARAMETER PARAMETER
NAME VALUE
CURSOR
The parameter value can then be changed using the UP and DOWN arrow buttons.
If the parameter has a numerical value, the UP arrow will increase the value and
the DOWN arrow will decrease the value. If the parameter has specific choices
that can be selected, the UP and DOWN arrow keys will scroll through the list of
possible settings. When the desired value or option is selected, press the ENTER
key to store the new setting. If the new setting is not ENTERED, it will not take
effect and the old setting will still be valid.
If the PROG/RUN key is pushed while the cursor is highlighting the parameter value,
the value will change back to the original setting (if it had been changed, but not
ENTERED), and the cursor will shift back to the parameter name. Pressing PROG/
RUN again will exit the PROGRAM mode. If the PROGRAM mode is entered again
within two minutes, the last parameter that was viewed, or changed, will come up on
the display. After two minutes has elapsed, the password will have to be entered
again when attempting to access the PROGRAM mode.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 416/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
- SPEED DIAL -
Once in SPEED DIAL, the UP and DOWN arrow keys will allow the operator to scroll
through the parameter numbers. The display will continue to show SPEED DIAL
while scrolling through the parameter numbers, as shown below:
When the desired parameter is reached, the SPEED DIAL display will be replaced
by the parameter name:
Once the desired parameter is displayed on the screen, press the ENTER key to
display the parameter name and present setting. The parameter setting can now
be changed by the method described in Section 16.1. Press the AUTO/MAN key
to return to SPEED DIAL.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 417/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM. PARAMETER RANGE OF FACTORY
NUMBER NAME ADJUSTMENT DEFAULT
0 LINE VOLTS HIGH, LOW, AUTO AUTO
1 SPEED #1 MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ 20.00 Hz
2 SPEED #2 MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ 20.00 Hz
3 SPEED #3 MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ 20.00 Hz
4 SPEED #4 MIN FRQ - MAX FRQ 20.00 Hz
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM. PARAMETER RANGE OF FACTORY
NUMBER NAME ADJUSTMENT DEFAULT
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
JOG FWD, JOG REV 419/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM. PARAMETER RANGE OF FACTORY
NUMBER NAME ADJUSTMENT DEFAULT
98 LANGUAGE
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
ENGLISH 420/458
99 FAULT HISTORY (VIEW - ONLY) (N/A)
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
When set to AUTO, the drive measures the DC bus voltage when power is applied
and automatically calibrates itself according to the measured value (DC bus voltage
is equal to input voltage multiplied by 1.4).
This parameter can also be set “manually”, using the HIGH or LOW settings. For
actual line voltages of 230/240 Vac (on 240/200 Vac models), 460/480 Vac (on
480/400 Vac models), or 575/590 Vac (on 590/480 Vac models), set this parameter
to HIGH. Also use the HIGH setting for 240/120 Vac single-phase input models.
Refer to the table below.
For actual line voltages of 200/208 Vac (on 240/200 Vac models), 380/415 Vac (on
480/400 Vac models), or 460/480 Vac (on 590 Vac models), set this parameter to
LOW. Refer to the table below.
1-4 SPEED #1- #4 (PRESET SPEEDS #1, #2, #3, AND #4)
PRESET SPEEDS are only active when the drive is in AUTO mode, and are activated
via contact closures between terminal TB-2 and terminals TB-13A, TB-13B, and
TB-13C. These terminals must be programmed as preset speed selects using
Parameters 47 - 49: TB13A, TB13B, and TB13C.
The preset speeds can only be set to values that are within the operating range
defined
and 11 -by the minimum
MAX FREQ). and maximum frequency (see Parameters: 10 - MIN FREQ,
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 421/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
PRESET ACTIVATION
PRESET # TB - 13A TB - 13B TB - 13C
NOTE: SPEED #4 is selected if any two of the three TB-13 terminals are closed
to TB-2.
5,6 SKIP #1 & #2 (SKIP SPEED #1 & #2)
avoidance,
commandedthe drive
to a would
speed of 22accelerate to 20
Hz or above. Hzdrive
The and would
remainthen
at that frequency
accelerate until
through
the range of avoidance to the new frequency.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 422/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 423/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
If an attempt is made to decelerate a high-inertia load too quickly, the motor will
regenerate voltage back into the drive. This will cause the DC bus voltage to rise,
which can result in a HI VOLTS fault. In order to prevent faulting, the drive will enter
DECEL FREEZE, which halts the deceleration until the DC bus voltage returns to
a normal level. The drive will then begin to decelerate again, and if necessary, will
enter DECEL FREEZE repeatedly to avoid faulting. If a very short deceleration
time is programmed, DECEL FREEZE may not be able to compensate fast enough,
resulting in a HI VOLTS fault.
In applications where very short deceleration times are required on high-inertia
loads, dynamic braking may be required. Consult the factory for more information
on the Dynamic Braking option.
10 MIN FRQ (MINIMUM FREQUENCY)
This parameter defines the lower limit of the drive’s speed range. MIN FRQ is
used in conjunction with MAX FRQ (Parameter 11 below) to define the operating
range of the drive.
If MIN FRQ is set to a value above 0.0 Hz, the drive will ramp up from 0.0 Hz when
given a start command. Once running, however, the drive will not operate below
the MIN FRQ setting unless the rotation is changed, or a stop command is issued
and the drive is programmed to ramp to a stop.
If the MINIMUM FREQUENCY is set to 0.0 Hz, the drive may be operated in ZERO
SPEED mode (drive is in RUN state, but there is no output to the motor). ZERO
SPEED operation can be used in applications requiring the ability to start and stop
the drive using only the selected speed reference. The drive will start when the
speed reference
is lowered is raised
to 0 VDC above
or 4 mA. 0 VDC
Note that or
the4 drive
mA, and it will
must stop when
be initially the using
started reference
one
of the normal start commands (keypad or terminal strip).
11 MAX FRQ (MAXIMUM FREQUENCY)
This parameter defines the upper limit of the drive’s speed range. MAX FRQ is
used in conjunction with MIN FRQ (Parameter 10 above) to define the operating
range of the drive.
WARNING!
Consult motor manufacturer
Overspeeding before
the motor and/or operating
driven motor above
equipment rateddamage
can cause frequency.
to
equipment and injury to personnel!
NOTE: If the drive is equipped with the High Frequency Output option, the range
of adjustment will be 1.00 - 650.0 Hz.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 424/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
cases
output where
currentthe motor
rating, full as
such load current rating
applications is significantly
where the drive is less than the
oversized drive
to meet
torque requirements.
Example 1: A 5 Hp, 480 Vac drive is operating a 3 HP motor with a full load current
rating of 4.8 amps. Divide the motor current rating by the drive output current rating:
4.8 / 7.6 = 63%. Entering this value will allow continuous operation at 4.8 amps,
and will also allow the motor to draw 7.2 amps (150% of 4.8 amps) for one minute.
If the setting is left at 100%, the motor could draw 11.4 amps (150% of 7.6 amps)
for one minute before tripping the drive.
The MC Series drive has two options for thermal overload protection. One depends on426/458
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
the
speed of the drive, and the other does not. The diagram below illustrates the difference
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
Example 2: A 480 Vac, 20 HP drive is operating a motor at 10 Hz. From the
diagram, a drive operating at 10 Hz can deliver about 75% of its output current
rating continuously. A 480 Vac, 20 HP drive’s output current rating is 27 Amps.
Therefore, the drive would be able to operate continuously at 20 Amps. The drive
would also be able to deliver 150% of that value (30 Amps) for one minute before
tripping into an OVERLOAD fault.
The “speed compensated” thermal overload is the factory default and should be
used in applications where the motor does not normally experience high loads at
low speeds for extended periods of time.
NON-COMPENSATED
D
100 T E
A
S
E N
P
M
S ) 80 C O
U (
%
O
U T S P E E D
N N
I E 60
T R
N R
O U
C C 40
M T
U U
M P
I T 20
X U
A O
M
10 20 30 40 50 60
FREQUENCY (Hz)
NOTE 1: The above diagram is based on a MOTOR OL setting of 100%. For lower
MOTOR OL settings, reduce the % CURRENT values by the same percentage. For
example, if MOTOR OL is set to 75%, reduce the % CURRENT values by 25%.
Therefore, the curve shifts down, but the shape of the curve remains the same.
The “non-compensated” thermal overload circuit allows 100% current continuously,
and 150%at
operating current
10 Hzfor one minute,
without at all speeds. Inprotection
“speed-compensated” the example above,
would the motor
be allowed to
operate continuously at 27 Amps, and could draw 40.5 Amps for one minute before
tripping. Without sufficient motor cooling, this can result in motor failure due to
overheating.
The “non-compensated” circuit is selected by setting Parameter 22 - TORQUE to
CT/NOCMP. The “non-compensated” setting should only be used in applications
where the motor is properly cooled at all speeds, or the motor manufacturer has
approved the motor for full-load operation at low speeds.
NOTE 2: The operation of the motor thermal overload circuit is affected by the
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
setting of Parameter 34 - LOAD MLT. 427/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
20 HP 2.00 %
25 HP 1.80 %
30 HP 1.60 %
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 428/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
The diagram below illustrates how FX BOOST and AC BOOST alter the V/Hz ratio
to increase motor torque.
FX BOOST sets the boost at 0 Hz (approximately 15% in the example above), and
as the output frequency approaches 30 Hz, the boost decreases to zero.
100
AC BOOST
90
80
70
)
(
% 60
E
G 50 FX BOOST
A
T
L
O 40
V
T
U 30
P
T
U 20
O
CONSTANT V/Hz
10
10 20 30 40 50 60
AC BOOST only functions during acceleration. In the diagram above, the drive
is operating at 35 Hz and is then commanded to 50 Hz. The output voltage is
increased by the AC BOOST setting (approximately 15% in the example above)
during acceleration to the new speed set point. Once the new set point is reached,
the output voltage returns to normal.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 430/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
Automatic start of equipment may result in damage to equipment and/or injury to
personnel! Automatic start should only be used on equipment that is inaccessible
to personnel.
This parameter selects the starting method for the drive, and can be set for one of
the following:
NORMAL The drive will start when the appropriate contact closure is
made on the terminal strip (in REMOTE mode), or by pressing
the keypad START key (in LOCAL mode). To start the drive
in NORMAL mode, a start command must be issued at least
two seconds AFTER input power is applied.
POWER UP The drive will automatically start upon application of input power.
The drive MUST be wired for a two-wire start/stop circuit (refer
to Section 14.0 - CONTROL WIRING). The start command
MUST be present when power is applied for this function to
operate.
AUTO RE- The drive will automatically restart after a protective fault or upon
application of input power. As with the POWER-UP option, a
start command must be present for this function to operate.
RE-BRAKE After a fault, the drive will apply DC braking equal to the DC
BRAKE setting for 15 seconds and then restart. This is done
to ensure the motor is stopped during the restart attempt, as
the drive will not start into a spinning motor.
NOTE 1: POWER UP, AUTO RE-, and RE-BRAKE settings are only active when
the drive is in REMOTE mode (see Parameter 30 - CONTROL).
NOTE 2: After a fault, the drive will attempt to restart five times, and if unsuccessful,
will shut down on a FAULT LOCKOUT. Every 15 minutes that passes will decrement
the restart counter by one. Therefore, 75 minutes after a successful restart, the
restart counter is fully reset, and the drive can once again attempt five restarts.
NOTE 3: The drive WILL NOT restart after the following faults: CONTROL and
PWR SAG. Also, if an OUTPUT fault occurs below 1.5 Hz, only one restart will be
attempted, after a four minute delay. If unsuccessful, it will then trip into FAULT
LOCKOUT, which will require a manual reset. This is done to protect the drive in
case of a shorted motor.
26 STOP (STOP MODE)
This parameter selects whether the motor will COAST to a stop, or RAMP to a stop,
when the drive is given a stop command.
COAST When a stop command is given, the drive shuts off the output
to the motor, allowing it to coast to a stop. The time required
for the motor to stop is governed by the inertia of the load.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 431/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
If TB-13C is programmed for RUN REVERSE, TB-1 is disabled and CANNOT be
used as a STOP switch! This is true in LOCAL and REMOTE mode. Incorrect
use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel! Refer
to Parameter 49 - TB13C for more information.
This parameter is used to limit the motor rotation direction to forward or reverse, or to
allow rotation in both directions. The parameter can be set to one of the following:
FORWARD Rotation is allowed in the forward direction only. This selection
disables the FWD/REV button on the keypad and TB-13C
(REVERSE).
REVERSE Rotation is allowed in the reverse direction only. This selection
disables the FWD/REV button on the keypad and TB-12A
(FORWARD). TB-13C must be programmed for either RUN REV
or STRT REV for this function to operate in the REMOTE mode.
FWD&REV Rotation is allowed in both directions. The FWD/REV button is
enabled. Rotation can be changed from the keypad (LOCAL
mode), or the terminal strip (REMOTE mode). In the REMOTE
mode, TB-13C must be programmed for either RUN REV or
STRT REV for this function to operate.
FWD@LOC In LOCAL mode, rotation is allowed in the forward direction only.
In REMOTE mode, rotation is allowed in both directions.
NOTE: If the rotation is changed while the drive is running, the drive will decelerate to
0 Hz, and then accelerate back up to the speed set point in the opposite direction.
28 AUTO / MAN (AUTO / MANUAL SPEED CONTROL)
This parameter is used to select the method of speed control when the drive is in
the LOCAL mode. The choices are explained below:
MANUAL The drive will accept a speed reference from the keypad (UP
and DOWN ARROW keys) or a speed potentiometer (wired
to TB-2, 5A, and 6). Parameter 29 - MANUAL below selects
either
on thekeypad
keypadorisspeed potentiometer. The AUTO/MAN button
disabled.
AUTO The drive will accept a 0-10 VDC input signal on TB-5A and
TB-2, a 4-20 mA input signal on TB-5B and TB-2, or one of the
four PRESET SPEEDS. The programming of TB-13A, TB-13B
and TB-13C determines which AUTO reference is selected.
The AUTO/MAN button on the keypad is disabled.
BOTH The AUTO/MAN key on the keypad is enabled and can be
used to toggle between MANUAL and AUTO control ONLY if
the drive is in LOCAL mode.
NOTE: If the drive is in the AUTO mode, and a speed reference is not selected
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 432/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
If CONTROL is set to LOCAL, TB-1 is disabled and CANNOT be used as a
STOP switch! Incorrect use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment and/or
injury to personnel!
WARNING!
STOP (TB-1) and EXTERNAL FAULT (TB-13D) circuitry may be disabled if
parameters are reset to factory defaults! The drive must be reprogrammed after a
RESET in order to insure proper operation (see Parameter 65 - PROGRAM).
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
INJURY TO PERSONNEL!
This parameter is used to select the source of the start/stop command and direction
control. The following settings are available:
LOCAL START/STOP and FORWARD/REVERSE commands from
the keypad only.
REMOTE START/STOP and FORWARD/REVERSE commands from
the terminal strip only.
BOTH LOCAL operation if TB-13A or TB-13C is programmed for
LOCAL SELECT and a contact closure is made from TB-13A
or TB-13C to TB-2. If the contact closure is not made, the drive
will be in REMOTE mode.
31 UNITS (SPEED/PID UNITS)
UNITS sets the units of the output speed or PID display on the keypad.
The following choices are available:
Speed mode: HERTZ, RPM, %HZ, /SEC, /MIN, /HR, GPH, NONE
PID mode: %, PSI, FPM, CFM, GPM, IN, FT, /SEC, /MIN, /HR, F, C,
MPM, GPH
NOTE: If one of the "pid" units is selected, but the drive is in Manual (open-loop)
speed control mode or PID MODE is DISABLED, the displayed speed units will
default to HERTZ. If one of the "speed" units is selected, but PID MODE is ENABLED
and the drive is in Auto mode, the displayed PID units will default to %.
32 HZ MULT (HERTZ MULTIPLIER)
The HZ MULTIPLIER is used to scale the output speed indication on the display.
If UNITS is set for HERTZ or % HZ, this parameter has no effect. Multiplying the
output frequency by the HZ MULTIPLIER will yield the desired speed value on the
display.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 433/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
MAX
causevalue if it istogiven
the drive run ata 60
5 VDC signal.
Hz when it isTherefore,
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf given a 5 setting TB5 MAX
VDC speed to 120
reference Hz will
signal. 435/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
WARNING!
When operating in JOG mode, the STOP key WILL NOT stop the drive. To stop
the drive, the contact between TB-13B and TB-2 must be opened.
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13B. Closing TB-13B
to TB-2 activates the TB-13B function. The following functions can be selected:
NONE Disables the TB-13B function.
0-10VDC Selects 0-10 VDC as the AUTO speed reference input. The
0-10 VDC signal is wired to TB-5A and TB-2.
4-20 MA Selects 4-20 mA as the AUTO speed reference input. The
4-20 mA signal is wired to TB-5B and TB-2.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 437/458
49 TB13C (TB-13C INPUT FUNCTION)
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13C. Closing TB-
13C to TB-2 activates the TB-13C input function. The following functions can be
selected:
NONE Disables the TB-13C function.
0-10VDC Selects 0-10 VDC as the AUTO speed reference input. The
0-10 VDC signal is wired to TB-5A and TB-2.
4-20 MA Selects 4-20 mA as the AUTO speed reference input. The
4-20 mA signal is wired to TB-5B and TB-2.
SPEED#3 Selects PRESET SPEED #3 as the AUTO speed reference.
LOC SEL LOCAL SELECT - Selects LOCAL mode when Parameter 30
- CONTROL is set to BOTH. Drive is in REMOTE mode if
contact closure is not made.
RUN REV RUN REVERSE - Run in reverse direction. Requires a
maintained contact closure - close to RUN in reverse direction,
open to STOP. This will cause TB-12A to function as RUN
FORWARD, also requiring a maintained contact to RUN in
forward.
STRT REV START REVERSE - Start in reverse direction. Requires a
momentary contact closure to RUN in reverse direction. A
momentary STOP contact must be wired between TB-1 and
TB-2. Setting this parameter to START REVERSE causes
TB-12A to function as START FORWARD, also requiring a
momentary contact closure to RUN in forward.
50 TB13D (TB-13D FUNCTION)
WARNING!
STOP (TB-1) and EXTERNAL FAULT (TB-13D) circuitry may be disabled if
parameters are reset to factory defaults! The drive must be reprogrammed after a
RESET in order to insure proper operation (see Parameter 65 - PROGRAM).
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
INJURY TO PERSONNEL!
RUN The relay energizes when the drive is given a START command,
and remains energized until: a STOP command is given and
the output frequency has decelerated to 0.5 Hz, the drive has
“tripped”, or the input voltage is removed. Note that this relay
indicates only that the drive is in the RUN mode. It does not
necessarily indicate that the motor is turning.
FAULT The relay energizes when input voltage is applied to the
drive and remains energized until the drive “trips” into a fault
condition, or input voltage is removed.
/ FAULT INVERSE FAULT - The relay energizes when the drive “trips”
into a fault condition, and remains energized until the fault
condition is cleared.
LOCK FAULT LOCKOUT - This relay is used when the drive is
programmed to automatically restart after a fault. The relay
energizes when input voltage is applied to the drive and
remains energized until the drive has faulted and unsuccessfully
attempted five restarts, or input voltage is removed.
@ SPEED AT SPEED - The relay energizes when the drive reaches the
speed set point. To avoid a “chattering” relay (energizing and
de-energizing), due to small fluctuations in speed, the relay will
remain energized as long as the actual speed is within + 3 Hz
of the speed set point.
ABOVE #3 ABOVE SPEED #3 - The relay energizes when the output
frequency exceeds the SPEED #3 value, and de-energizes
when the output frequency returns to a value lower than the
SPEED #3 value. See Parameter 3 - SPEED #3 in Section
18.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
MIN/MAX ALARM The relay energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode) or
the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) is within
the limits set by MIN ALARM and MAX ALARM (Parameters
81 and 82), and de-energizes when the signal falls below the
MIN ALARM setting or exceeds the MAX ALARM setting.
INV MIN/MAX A INVERSE MIN/MAX ALARM - The relay de-energizes when the
feedback signal (in PID mode) or the speed reference signal (in
open-loop speed mode) is within the limits set by MIN ALARM
and MAX ALARM (Parameters 81 and 82), and energizes when
the signal falls below the MIN ALARM setting or exceeds the
MAX ALARM setting.
MIN ALARM The relay de-energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode)
equals or exceeds the MIN ALARM setting (Parameter 81),
and energizes when the signal falls below the MIN ALARM
setting.
INV MIN ALARM INVERSE MIN ALARM - The relay energizes when the feedback
signal (in PID mode) or the speed reference signal (in open-
loop speed mode) equals or exceeds the MIN ALARM setting
(Parameter 81), and de-energizes when the signal falls below
the MIN ALARM setting.
MAX ALARM The relay de-energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) is less
than or equal
energizes whento the
theMAX
signalALARM setting
exceeds (Parameter
the MAX ALARM82), and
setting.
INV MAX ALARM INVERSE MAX ALARM - The relay energizes when the
feedback signal (in PID mode) or the speed reference signal
(in open-loop speed mode) is less than or equal to the MAX
ALARM setting (Parameter 82), and de-energizes when the
signal exceeds the MAX ALARM setting.
SLEEP The relay energizes when the drive is in SLEEP MODE. See
Parameters 36 - 38.
SPD = 0HZ The relay energizes when there is no output to the motor, for
any reason, such as: drive is in STOP mode, drive is in RUN
mode but the speed command is 0 Hz, drive is in SLEEP mode,
drive has tripped into a fault, etc.
The open-collector output circuit is a current-sinking type rated at 30 VDC and 40
mA maximum. An external power supply (30 VDC max.) must be used to power
the open-collector outputs. The drive does not have a dedicated power supply for
the open-collector outputs.
53 TB15 OUT (TB-15 OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT)
This parameter sets the open-collector output indication for terminal TB-15. It440/458
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf has
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
The FORM C contacts at TB-16, 17, and 18 are rated 2 amps at 28 VDC or 120 Vac.
Control wiring diagrams show relays in the rest state (coils NOT energized).
NOTE: Models rated above 30 Hp at 200/240 Vac and 60 Hp at 400/480 Vac have a
second Form C relay at terminals TB-19, TB-20, and TB-21. This relay is controlled
by Parameter 52 - TB14 OUT.
WARNING!
STOP (TB-1) and EXTERNAL FAULT (TB-13D) circuitry may be disabled if
parameters are reset to factory defaults! The drive must be reprogrammed after
a RESET in order to insure proper operation.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 442/458
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
This parameter is used to reset the programmable parameters back to the factory
default settings. This parameter has four possible settings:
MAINTAIN Maintain parameter settings as they are.
RESET 60 Resets parameters to factory defaults for 60 Hz base
frequency.
RESET 50 Resets parameters to factory defaults for 50 Hz base
frequency.
RST HIGH Resets parameters to factory defaults for 650 Hz base
frequency. This option will only appear if the drive is equipped
with the High Frequency Output option.
When a factory reset is performed, the following terminals are affected:
TB-1 will be disabled as a STOP input because Parameter 30 - CONTROL will
default to LOCAL.
TB-13A, 13B, and 13C will be disabled because Parameters 47, 48, and 49 will
default to NONE. If TB-13C was set to RUN REVERSE, TB-12A will default to a
momentary START contact.
TB-13D will default to a normally open EXTERNAL FAULT contact because
Parameter 50 - TB13D will be reset to EXT FAULT.
NOTE: This parameter will display RESET 60, RESET 50 or RST HIGH until a
change is made to one or more of the parameter settings. Once a parameter is
changed, the display will change to MAINTAIN.
66 HISTORY (CLEAR FAULT HISTORY)
This parameter is used to clear the previous faults in the FAULT HISTORY. When set
to CLEAR and the ENTER key is pushed, the display will change to MAINTAIN, and
the FAULT HISTORY will display NO FAULT for each of the eight fault histories.
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in LOCAL and AUTO mode, the drive will
also operate in a CLOSED LOOP fashion. However, in this case, the only set point
reference available is the keypad, and the SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indication
in the CONTROL display will indicate AKB.
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in MANUAL and LOCAL or REMOTE mode,
the drive will operate in an OPEN LOOP fashion, responding directly to speed
commands from the keypad only. The SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indication
in the CONTROL display will indicate MKB.
When PID is disabled, the drive will operate in an OPEN LOOP mode, responding
directly to speed commands from either the keypad (MANUAL mode) or an analog
input signal or preset speed (AUTO mode).
This parameter setting represents the speed command output (in % of maximum
speed) that results from each 1% of error (1% of the feedback range; FB @ MAX
minus FB @ MIN).
Example: If P GAIN is programmed for 5%, and the error (difference between set
point and feedback) is 10%, the speed command output of the Proportional term is
50% (10 x 5 = 50) of maximum speed.
NOTE 1: The MIN/MAX ALARM function can be used to start and stop the drive
based on the level of the speed reference signal or PID feedback signal. This is
done by wiring a 2-wire start/stop circuit through the drive's Form C relay or open-
collector output, and setting the Form C relay or open-collector output for MIN/MAX
(see Parameters 52, 53, and 54). When the signal drops below the MIN ALARM
setting, the relay or open-collector output will de-energize, which opens the start
contact and stops the drive. When the signal is equal to or greater than the MIN
ALARM setting, the relay or open-collector output will energize, which closes the
start contact and starts the drive. The drive must be in REMOTE mode to use the
MIN/MAX function to start and stop the drive.
NOTE 2: When using the MIN and MAX ALARM functions in open-loop speed
mode (PID is disabled), parameter 74 - PID FB must still be set to match the speed
reference signal being used.
98 LANGUAGE (LANGUAGE SELECTION)
The MC Series drive can support other languages with the addition of an optional
LANGUAGE EEPROM chip installed in socket U11 on the control board of the
drive. If the EEPROM is not present, the default language will be ENGLISH. Also,
this parameter is not affected when the parameters are reset using Parameter 65
-remain
PROGRAM.
in effect Therefore, if a language other than ENGLISH is selected, it will
after a RESET.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 445/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
The FAULT HISTORY indicates the number of the fault (number 1 is the most
recent fault), the fault message, and the status of the drive at the time of the fault.
An example is shown below:
3 OVERLOAD RUN
In the example above, the third fault log is being viewed, which is an OVERLOAD
fault that occurred while the drive was in a RUN state
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 446/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
Process Variable
Feedback (transducer)
POT The positive signal wire (wiper) is connected to TB-5A, and the
“high” lead is connected to TB-6.
0-5, 0-10 VDC Connect the positive signal wire to TB-5A.
4-20 mA Connect the positive signal wire to TB-5B.
The common, or negative signal wire, is connected to TB-2 (circuit common).
Feedback devices can be direct or reverse acting. A direct acting device outputs
a signal that increases as the process variable increases. A reverse acting device
outputs a signal that decreases as the process variable increases. The programming
of Parameters 75 - FB @ MIN and 76 - FB @ MAX depend on the type of feedback
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 447/458
device being used.
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
PID
UNITS
DRIVE PERCENT
STATUS LOAD
DRIVE PID
STATUS FEEDBACK
PID
UNITS
In the examples above, the drive is running at 42.53 Hz to maintain the PID SET
POINT of 35.0 psi. Pressing the ENTER key displays % LOAD, which is 57%.
Pressing ENTER again displays the PID FEEDBACK from the process, which is
33.7 psi.
When the PID SET POINT and PID FEEDBACK displays are entered, the display
will flash SET POINT or FEEDBACK before displaying the value to indicate which
display is being viewed.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 450/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
20.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
The table below lists the fault conditions that will cause the drive to shut down, as
well as some possible causes. Please contact the factory for more information on
troubleshooting faults.
FAULT MESSAGES
FAULT MESSAGES
INTERNAL Internal fault: The micro- proces- Electrical noise on control wiring.
INTERN (#) sor has sensed a problem. Defective microprocessor.
Blank display or The power supply has shut down. Check heatsink fans (if equipped).
repeatedly flashes This can be the result of clogged or Clear any obstructions. If they are
TESTING failed heatsink fans. not clogged, contact the AC Tech
(drive will not run) Service Department.
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 452/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
1 SPEED #1 20.00 Hz
2 SPEED #2 20.00 Hz
3 SPEED #3 20.00 Hz
4 SPEED #4 20.00 Hz
5 SKIP #1 .00 Hz
6 SKIP #2 .00 Hz
12 DC BRAKE .0 VDC
13 DC TIME .0 SEC
16 CURRENT 180 %
17 MOTOR OL 100%
18 BASE 60.00 Hz
19 FX BOOST (NOTE 1)
20 AC BOOST 0.00%
21 SLIP CMP
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf
0% 453/458
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
25 START NORMAL
26 STOP COAST
27 ROTATION FORWARD
28 AUTO/MAN BOTH
29 MANUAL KEYPAD
30 CONTROL LOCAL
32 HZ MULT 1.00
33 SPEED DP XXXXX
35 CONTRAST MED
36 SLEEP TH .00 Hz
38 SLEEP BW 0%
43 @TB10A 60.00 Hz
45 @TB10B 125%
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 454/458
47 TB13A NONE
able7/23/2019
of Contents DT9 manual.pdf
54 RELAY NONE
57 SERIAL DISABLE
58 ADDRESS 30
61 PASSWORD 0019
63 SOFTWARE (N/A)
64 MONITOR ON
65 PROGRAM RESET 60
66 HISTORY MAINTAIN
70 PID MODE OFF
74 PID FB TB-5A
75 FB @ MIN 0.00 %
76 FB @ MAX 100.00 %
77 P GAIN 5.00 %
78 I GAIN 0.0 SEC
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 457/458
7/23/2019 DT9 manual.pdf
Stock Redler India Private Limited recommends purchasing and holding in reserve the following
replacement parts to reduce any downtime that might occur due to component failure. Having these
replacement parts on hand would allow for the equipment to return to operational status with minimal
downtime. For a price quote or to place an order, call the Parts Department at (080) 3040-3705/706/707
extension 650 or fax to (080) 3040-3708.
The quantities shown in the list below reflect spare parts required for one feeder conversion.
Motor FE14364 1
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dt9-manualpdf 458/458